Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

the succession of the letters

  • 1 ab

    ăb, ā, abs, prep. with abl. This IndoEuropean particle (Sanscr. apa or ava, Etr. av, Gr. upo, Goth. af, Old Germ. aba, New Germ. ab, Engl. of, off) has in Latin the following forms: ap, af, ab (av), au-, a, a; aps, abs, as-. The existence of the oldest form, ap, is proved by the oldest and best MSS. analogous to the prep. apud, the Sanscr. api, and Gr. epi, and by the weakened form af, which, by the rule of historical grammar and the nature of the Latin letter f, can be derived only from ap, not from ab. The form af, weakened from ap, also very soon became obsolete. There are but five examples of it in inscriptions, at the end of the sixth and in the course of the seventh century B. C., viz.:

    AF VOBEIS,

    Inscr. Orell. 3114;

    AF MVRO,

    ib. 6601;

    AF CAPVA,

    ib. 3308;

    AF SOLO,

    ib. 589;

    AF LYCO,

    ib. 3036 ( afuolunt =avolant, Paul. ex Fest. p. 26 Mull., is only a conjecture). In the time of Cicero this form was regarded as archaic, and only here and there used in account-books; v. Cic. Or. 47, 158 (where the correct reading is af, not abs or ab), and cf. Ritschl, Monum. Epigr. p. 7 sq.—The second form of this preposition, changed from ap, was ab, which has become the principal form and the one most generally used through all periods—and indeed the only oue used before all vowels and h; here and there also before some consonants, particularly l, n, r, and s; rarely before c, j, d, t; and almost never before the labials p, b, f, v, or before m, such examples as ab Massiliensibus, Caes. B. C. 1, 35, being of the most rare occurrence.—By changing the b of ab through v into u, the form au originated, which was in use only in the two compounds aufero and aufugio for abfero, ab-fugio; aufuisse for afuisse, in Cod. Medic. of Tac. A. 12, 17, is altogether unusual. Finally, by dropping the b of ab, and lengthening the a, ab was changed into a, which form, together with ab, predominated through all periods of the Latin language, and took its place before all consonants in the later years of Cicero, and after him almoet exclusively.—By dropping the b without lengthening the a, ab occurs in the form a- in the two compounds a-bio and a-perio, q. v.—On the other hand, instead of reducing ap to a and a, a strengthened collateral form, aps, was made by adding to ap the letter s (also used in particles, as in ex, mox, vix). From the first, aps was used only before the letters c, q, t, and was very soon changed into abs (as ap into ab):

    abs chorago,

    Plaut. Pers. 1, 3, 79 (159 Ritschl):

    abs quivis,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 3, 1:

    abs terra,

    Cato, R. R. 51;

    and in compounds: aps-cessero,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 1, 24 (625 R.); id. ib. 3, 2, 84 (710 R): abs-condo, abs-que, abs-tineo, etc. The use of abs was confined almost exclusively to the combination abs te during the whole ante-classic period, and with Cicero till about the year 700 A. U. C. (=B. C. 54). After that time Cicero evidently hesitates between abs te and a te, but during the last five or six years of his life a te became predominant in all his writings, even in his letters; consequently abs te appears but rarely in later authors, as in Liv. 10, 19, 8; 26, 15, 12;

    and who, perhaps, also used abs conscendentibus,

    id. 28, 37, 2; v. Drakenb. ad. h. l. (Weissenb. ab).—Finally abs, in consequence of the following p, lost its b, and became ds- in the three compounds aspello, as-porto, and as-pernor (for asspernor); v. these words.—The late Lat. verb abbrevio may stand for adbrevio, the d of ad being assimilated to the following b.The fundamental signification of ab is departure from some fixed point (opp. to ad. which denotes motion to a point).
    I.
    In space, and,
    II.
    Fig., in time and other relations, in which the idea of departure from some point, as from source and origin, is included; Engl. from, away from, out of; down from; since, after; by, at, in, on, etc.
    I.
    Lit., in space: ab classe ad urbem tendunt, Att. ap. Non. 495, 22 (Trag. Rel. p. 177 Rib.):

    Caesar maturat ab urbe proficisci,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 7:

    fuga ab urbe turpissima,

    Cic. Att. 7, 21:

    ducite ab urbe domum, ducite Daphnim,

    Verg. E. 8, 68. Cicero himself gives the difference between ab and ex thus: si qui mihi praesto fuerit cum armatis hominibus extra meum fundum et me introire prohibuerit, non ex eo, sed ab ( from, away from) eo loco me dejecerit....Unde dejecti Galli? A Capitolio. Unde, qui cum Graccho fucrunt? Ex Capitolio, etc., Cic. Caecin. 30, 87; cf. Diom. p. 408 P., and a similar distinction between ad and in under ad.—Ellipt.: Diogenes Alexandro roganti, ut diceret, si quid opus esset: Nunc quidem paululum, inquit, a sole, a little out of the sun, Cic. Tusc. 5, 32, 92. —Often joined with usque:

    illam (mulierem) usque a mari supero Romam proficisci,

    all the way from, Cic. Clu. 68, 192; v. usque, I.—And with ad, to denote the space passed over: siderum genus ab ortu ad occasum commeant, from... to, Cic. N. D. 2, 19 init.; cf. ab... in:

    venti a laevo latere in dextrum, ut sol, ambiunt,

    Plin. 2, 47, 48, § 128.
    b.
    Sometimes with names of cities and small islands, or with domus (instead of the usual abl.), partie., in militnry and nautieal language, to denote the marching of soldiers, the setting out of a flcet, or the departure of the inhabitants from some place:

    oppidum ab Aenea fugiente a Troja conditum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33:

    quemadmodum (Caesar) a Gergovia discederet,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 43 fin.; so id. ib. 7, 80 fin.; Sall. J. 61; 82; 91; Liv. 2, 33, 6 al.; cf.:

    ab Arimino M. Antonium cum cohortibus quinque Arretium mittit,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 11 fin.; and:

    protinus a Corfinio in Siciliam miserat,

    id. ib. 1, 25, 2:

    profecti a domo,

    Liv. 40, 33, 2;

    of setting sail: cum exercitus vestri numquam a Brundisio nisi hieme summa transmiserint,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 32; so id. Fam. 15, 3, 2; Caes. B. C. 3, 23; 3, 24 fin.:

    classe qua advecti ab domo fuerant,

    Liv. 8, 22, 6;

    of citizens: interim ab Roma legatos venisse nuntiatum est,

    Liv. 21, 9, 3; cf.:

    legati ab Orico ad M. Valerium praetorem venerunt,

    id. 24, 40, 2.
    c.
    Sometimes with names of persons or with pronouns: pestem abige a me, Enn. ap. Cic. Ac. 2, 28, 89 (Trag. v. 50 Vahl.):

    Quasi ad adulescentem a patre ex Seleucia veniat,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 41; cf.:

    libertus a Fuflis cum litteris ad Hermippum venit,

    Cic. Fl. 20, 47:

    Nigidium a Domitio Capuam venisse,

    id. Att. 7, 24:

    cum a vobis discessero,

    id. Sen. 22:

    multa merces tibi defluat ab Jove Neptunoque,

    Hor. C. 1, 28, 29 al. So often of a person instead of his house, lodging, etc.: videat forte hic te a patre aliquis exiens, from the father, i. e. from his house, Ter. Heaut. 2, 2, 6:

    so a fratre,

    id. Phorm. 5, 1, 5:

    a Pontio,

    Cic. Att. 5, 3 fin.:

    ab ea,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 21; and so often: a me, a nobis, a se, etc., from my, our, his house, etc., Plaut. Stich. 5, 1, 7; Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 50; Cic. Att. 4, 9, 1 al.
    B.
    Transf., without the idea of motion. To designate separation or distance, with the verbs abesse, distare, etc., and with the particles longe, procul, prope, etc.
    1.
    Of separation:

    ego te afuisse tam diu a nobis dolui,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 1, 2:

    abesse a domo paulisper maluit,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 18, § 39:

    tum Brutus ab Roma aberat,

    Sall. C. 40, 5:

    absint lacerti ab stabulis,

    Verg. G. 4, 14.—
    2.
    Of distance:

    quot milia fundus suus abesset ab urbe,

    Cic. Caecin. 10, 28; cf.:

    nos in castra properabamus, quae aberant bidui,

    id. Att. 5, 16 fin.; and:

    hic locus aequo fere spatio ab castris Ariovisti et Caesaris aberat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 43, 1:

    terrae ab hujusce terrae, quam nos incolimus, continuatione distantes,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 66, 164:

    non amplius pedum milibus duobus ab castris castra distabant,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 82, 3; cf. id. lb. 1, 3, 103.—With adverbs: annos multos longinque ab domo bellum gerentes, Enn. ap. Non. 402, 3 (Trag. v. 103 Vahl.):

    cum domus patris a foro longe abesset,

    Cic. Cael. 7, 18 fin.; cf.:

    qui fontes a quibusdam praesidiis aberant longius,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 49, 5:

    quae procul erant a conspectu imperii,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 32, 87; cf.:

    procul a castris hostes in collibus constiterunt,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 17, 1; and:

    tu procul a patria Alpinas nives vides,

    Verg. E. 10, 46 (procul often also with simple abl.;

    v. procul): cum esset in Italia bellum tam prope a Sicilia, tamen in Sicilia non fuit,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 2, § 6; cf.:

    tu apud socrum tuam prope a meis aedibus sedebas,

    id. Pis. 11, 26; and:

    tam prope ab domo detineri,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 3, § 6.—So in Caesar and Livy, with numerals to designate the measure of the distance:

    onerariae naves, quae ex eo loco ab milibus passuum octo vento tenebatur,

    eight miles distant, Caes. B. G. 4, 22, 4; and without mentioning the terminus a quo: ad castra contenderunt, et ab milibus passunm minus duobus castra posuerunt, less than two miles off or distant, id. ib. 2, 7, 3; so id. ib. 2, 5, 32; 6, 7, 3; id. B. C. 1, 65; Liv. 38, 20, 2 (for which:

    duo milia fere et quingentos passus ab hoste posuerunt castra,

    id. 37, 38, 5). —
    3.
    To denote the side or direction from which an object is viewed in its local relations,=a parte, at, on, in: utrum hacin feriam an ab laeva latus? Enn. ap. Plaut. Cist. 3, 10 (Trag. v. 38 Vahl.); cf.:

    picus et cornix ab laeva, corvos, parra ab dextera consuadent,

    Plaut. As. 2, 1, 12: clamore ab ea parte audito. on this side, Caes. B. G. 3, 26, 4: Gallia Celtica attingit ab Sequanis et Helvetiis flumen Rhenum, on the side of the Sequani, i. e. their country, id. ib. 1, 1, 5:

    pleraque Alpium ab Italia sicut breviora ita arrectiora sunt,

    on the Italian side, Liv. 21, 35, 11:

    non eadem diligentia ab decumuna porta castra munita,

    at the main entrance, Caes. B. G. 3, 25 fin.:

    erat a septentrionibus collis,

    on the north, id. ib. 7, 83, 2; so, ab oriente, a meridie, ab occasu; a fronte, a latere, a tergo, etc. (v. these words).
    II.
    Fig.
    A.
    In time.
    1.
    From a [p. 3] point of time, without reference to the period subsequently elapsed. After:

    Exul ab octava Marius bibit,

    Juv. 1,40:

    mulieres jam ab re divin[adot ] adparebunt domi,

    immediately after the sucrifice, Plaut. Poen. 3, 3, 4:

    Caesar ab decimae legionis cohortatione ad dextrum cornu profectus,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:

    ab hac contione legati missi sunt,

    immediately after, Liv. 24, 22, 6; cf. id. 28, 33, 1; 40, 47, 8; 40, 49, 1 al.:

    ab eo magistratu,

    after this office, Sall. J. 63, 5:

    a summa spe novissima exspectabat,

    after the greatest hope, Tac. A. 6, 50 fin. —Strengthened by the adverbs primum, confestim, statim, protinus, or the adj. recens, immediately after, soon after:

    ut primum a tuo digressu Romam veni,

    Cic. Att. 1, 5, 4; so Suet. Tib. 68:

    confestim a proelio expugnatis hostium castris,

    Liv. 30, 36, 1:

    statim a funere,

    Suet. Caes. 85;

    and followed by statim: ab itinere statim,

    id. ib. 60:

    protinus ab adoptione,

    Vell. 2, 104, 3:

    Homerus qui recens ab illorum actate fuit,

    soon after their time, Cic. N. D. 3, 5; so Varr. R. R. 2, 8, 2; Verg. A. 6, 450 al. (v. also primum, confestim, etc.).—

    Sometimes with the name of a person or place, instead of an action: ibi mihi tuae litterae binae redditae sunt tertio abs te die,

    i. e. after their departure from you, Cic. Att. 5, 3, 1: in Italiam perventum est quinto mense a Carthagine Nov[adot ], i. e. after leaving (=postquam a Carthagine profecti sunt), Liv. 21, 38, 1:

    secundo Punico (bello) Scipionis classis XL. die a securi navigavit,

    i. e. after its having been built, Plin. 16, 39, 74, § 192. —Hence the poct. expression: ab his, after this (cf. ek toutôn), i. e. after these words, hereupon, Ov. M. 3, 273; 4, 329; 8, 612; 9, 764.
    2.
    With reference to a subsequent period. From, since, after:

    ab hora tertia bibebatur,

    from the third hour, Cic. Phil. 2, 41:

    infinito ex tempore, non ut antea, ab Sulla et Pompeio consulibus,

    since the consulship of, id. Agr. 2, 21, 56:

    vixit ab omni aeternitate,

    from all eternity, id. Div. 1, 51, 115:

    cum quo a condiscipulatu vivebat conjunctissime,

    Nep. Att. 5, 3:

    in Lycia semper a terrae motu XL. dies serenos esse,

    after an earthquake, Plin. 2, 96, 98, § 211 al.:

    centesima lux est haec ab interitu P. Clodii,

    since the death of, Cic. Mil. 35, 98; cf.:

    cujus a morte quintus hic et tricesimus annus est,

    id. Sen. 6, 19; and:

    ab incenso Capitolio illum esse vigesumiun annum,

    since, Sall. C. 47, 2:

    diebus triginta, a qua die materia caesa est,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 36.—Sometimes joined with usque and inde:

    quod augures omnes usque ab Romulo decreverunt,

    since the time of, Cic. Vat. 8, 20:

    jam inde ab infelici pugna ceciderant animi,

    from the very beginning of, Liv. 2, 65 fin. —Hence the adverbial expressions ab initio, a principio, a primo, at, in, or from the beginning, at first; v. initium, principium, primus. Likewise ab integro, anew, afresh; v. integer.—Ab... ad, from (a time)... to:

    ab hora octava ad vesperum secreto collocuti sumus,

    Cic. Att. 7, 8, 4; cf.:

    cum ab hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 26, 2; and:

    a quo tempore ad vos consules anni sunt septingenti octoginta unus,

    Vell. 1, 8, 4; and so in Plautus strengthened by usque:

    pugnata pugnast usque a mane ad vesperum,

    from morning to evening, Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 97; id. Most. 3, 1, 3; 3, 2, 80.—Rarely ab... in: Romani ab sole orto in multum diei stetere in acie, from... till late in the day, Liv. 27, 2, 9; so Col. 2, 10, 17; Plin. 2, 31, 31, § 99; 2, 103, 106, § 229; 4, 12, 26, § 89.
    b.
    Particularly with nouns denoting a time of life:

    qui homo cum animo inde ab ineunte aetate depugnat suo,

    from an early age, from early youth, Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 24; so Cic. Off. 2, 13, 44 al.:

    mihi magna cum co jam inde a pueritia fuit semper famillaritas,

    Ter. Heaut. 1, 2, 9; so,

    a pueritia,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 11, 27 fin.; id. Fam. 5, 8, 4:

    jam inde ab adulescentia,

    Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 16:

    ab adulescentia,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 1:

    jam a prima adulescentia,

    id. Fam. 1, 9, 23:

    ab ineunte adulescentia,

    id. ib. 13, 21, 1; cf.

    followed by ad: usque ad hanc aetatem ab incunte adulescentia,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 20:

    a primis temporibus aetatis,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 3:

    a teneris unguiculis,

    from childhood, id. ib. 1, 6, 2:

    usque a toga pura,

    id. Att. 7, 8, 5:

    jam inde ab incunabulis,

    Liv. 4, 36, 5:

    a prima lanugine,

    Suet. Oth. 12:

    viridi ab aevo,

    Ov. Tr. 4, 10, 17 al.;

    rarely of animals: ab infantia,

    Plin. 10, 63, 83, § 182.—Instead of the nom. abstr. very often (like the Greek ek paioôn, etc.) with concrete substantives: a pucro, ab adulescente, a parvis, etc., from childhood, etc.:

    qui olim a puero parvulo mihi paedagogus fuerat,

    Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 90; so,

    a pausillo puero,

    id. Stich. 1, 3, 21:

    a puero,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 36, 115; id. Fam. 13, 16, 4 (twice) al.:

    a pueris,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; id. de Or. 1, 1, 2 al.:

    ab adulescente,

    id. Quint. 3, 12:

    ab infante,

    Col. 1, 8, 2:

    a parva virgine,

    Cat. 66, 26 al. —Likewise and in the same sense with adject.: a parvo, from a little child, or childhood, Liv. 1, 39, 6 fin.; cf.:

    a parvis,

    Ter. And. 3, 3, 7; Cic. Leg. 2, 4, 9:

    a parvulo,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 8; id. Ad. 1, 1, 23; cf.:

    ab parvulis,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 21, 3:

    ab tenero,

    Col. 5, 6, 20;

    and rarely of animals: (vacca) a bima aut trima fructum ferre incipit,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 1, 13.
    B.
    In other relations in which the idea of going forth, proceeding, from something is included.
    1.
    In gen. to denote departure, separation, deterring, avoiding, intermitting, etc., or distance, difference, etc., of inanimate or abstract things. From: jus atque aecum se a malis spernit procul, Enn. ap. Non. 399, 10 (Trag. v. 224 Vahl.):

    suspitionem et culpam ut ab se segregent,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 42:

    qui discessum animi a corpore putent esse mortem,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 18:

    hic ab artificio suo non recessit,

    id. ib. 1, 10, 20 al.:

    quod si exquiratur usque ab stirpe auctoritas,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 180:

    condicionem quam ab te peto,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 87; cf.:

    mercedem gloriae flagitas ab iis, quorum, etc.,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 15, 34:

    si quid ab illo acceperis,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 90:

    quae (i. e. antiquitas) quo propius aberat ab ortu et divina progenie,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 12, 26:

    ab defensione desistere,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 12, 4:

    ne quod tempus ab opere intermitteretur,

    id. B. G. 7, 24, 2:

    ut homines adulescentis a dicendi studio deterream,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 25, 117, etc.—Of distance (in order, rank, mind, or feeling):

    qui quartus ab Arcesila fuit,

    the fourth in succession from, Cic. Ac. 1, 12, 46:

    tu nunc eris alter ab illo,

    next after him, Verg. E. 5, 49; cf.:

    Aiax, heros ab Achille secundus,

    next in rank to, Hor. S. 2, 3, 193:

    quid hoc ab illo differt,

    from, Cic. Caecin. 14, 39; cf.:

    hominum vita tantum distat a victu et cultu bestiarum,

    id. Off. 2, 4, 15; and:

    discrepare ab aequitate sapientiam,

    id. Rep. 3, 9 fin. (v. the verbs differo, disto, discrepo, dissideo, dissentio, etc.):

    quae non aliena esse ducerem a dignitate,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 7:

    alieno a te animo fuit,

    id. Deiot. 9, 24 (v. alienus). —So the expression ab re (qs. aside from the matter, profit; cf. the opposite, in rem), contrary to one's profit, to a loss, disadvantageous (so in the affirmative very rare and only ante-class.):

    subdole ab re consulit,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 1, 12; cf. id. Capt. 2, 2, 88; more frequently and class. (but not with Cicero) in the negative, non, haud, ab re, not without advantage or profit, not useless or unprofitable, adcantageous:

    haut est ab re aucupis,

    Plaut. As. 1, 3, 71:

    non ab re esse Quinctii visum est,

    Liv. 35, 32, 6; so Plin. 27, 8, 35; 31, 3, 26; Suet. Aug. 94; id. Dom. 11; Gell. 18, 14 fin.; App. Dogm. Plat. 3, p. 31, 22 al. (but in Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 44, ab re means with respect to the money matter).
    2.
    In partic.
    a.
    To denote an agent from whom an action proceeds, or by whom a thing is done or takes place. By, and in archaic and solemn style, of. So most frequently with pass. or intrans. verbs with pass. signif., when the active object is or is considered as a living being: Laudari me abs te, a laudato viro, Naev. ap. Cic. Tusc. 4, 31, 67: injuria abs te afficior, Enn. ap. Auct. Her. 2, 24, 38:

    a patre deductus ad Scaevolam,

    Cic. Lael. 1, 1:

    ut tamquam a praesentibus coram haberi sermo videretur,

    id. ib. 1, 3:

    disputata ab eo,

    id. ib. 1, 4 al.:

    illa (i. e. numerorum ac vocum vis) maxime a Graecia vetere celebrata,

    id. de Or. 3, 51, 197:

    ita generati a natura sumus,

    id. Off. 1, 29, 103; cf.:

    pars mundi damnata a rerum natura,

    Plin. 4, 12, 26, § 88:

    niagna adhibita cura est a providentia deorum,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 51 al. —With intrans. verbs:

    quae (i. e. anima) calescit ab eo spiritu,

    is warmed by this breath, Cic. N. D. 2, 55, 138; cf. Ov. M. 1, 417: (mare) qua a sole collucet, Cic. Ac. 2, 105:

    salvebis a meo Cicerone,

    i. e. young Cicero sends his compliments to you, id. Att. 6, 2 fin.:

    a quibus (Atheniensibus) erat profectus,

    i. e. by whose command, Nep. Milt. 2, 3:

    ne vir ab hoste cadat,

    Ov. H. 9, 36 al. —A substantive or adjective often takes the place of the verb (so with de, q. v.):

    levior est plaga ab amico quam a debitore,

    Cic. Fam. 9, 16, 7; cf.:

    a bestiis ictus, morsus, impetus,

    id. Off. 2, 6, 19:

    si calor est a sole,

    id. N. D. 2, 52:

    ex iis a te verbis (for a te scriptis),

    id. Att. 16, 7, 5:

    metu poenae a Romanis,

    Liv. 32, 23, 9:

    bellum ingens a Volscis et Aequis,

    id. 3, 22, 2:

    ad exsolvendam fldem a consule,

    id. 27, 5, 6.—With an adj.:

    lassus ab equo indomito,

    Hor. S. 2, 2, 10:

    Murus ab ingenic notior ille tuo,

    Prop. 5, 1, 126:

    tempus a nostris triste malis,

    time made sad by our misfortunes, Ov. Tr. 4, 3, 36.—Different from per:

    vulgo occidebantur: per quos et a quibus?

    by whom and upon whose orders? Cic. Rosc. Am. 29, 80 (cf. id. ib. 34, 97: cujus consilio occisus sit, invenio; cujus manu sit percussus, non laboro); so,

    ab hoc destitutus per Thrasybulum (i. e. Thrasybulo auctore),

    Nep. Alc. 5, 4.—Ambiguity sometimes arises from the fact that the verb in the pass. would require ab if used in the active:

    si postulatur a populo,

    if the people demand it, Cic. Off. 2, 17, 58, might also mean, if it is required of the people; on the contrary: quod ab eo (Lucullo) laus imperatoria non admodum exspectabatur, not since he did not expect military renown, but since they did not expect military renown from him, Cic. Ac. 2, 1, 2, and so often; cf. Rudd. II. p. 213. (The use of the active dative, or dative of the agent, instead of ab with the pass., is well known, Zumpt, § 419. It is very seldom found in prose writers of the golden age of Roman liter.; with Cic. sometimes joined with the participles auditus, cognitus, constitutus, perspectus, provisus, susceptus; cf. Halm ad Cic. Imp. Pomp. 24, 71, and ad ejusdem, Cat. 1, 7 fin.; but freq. at a later period; e. g. in Pliny, in Books 2-4 of H. N., more than twenty times; and likewise in Tacitus seventeen times. Vid. the passages in Nipperd. ad Tac. A. 2, 49.) Far more unusual is the simple abl. in the designation of persons:

    deseror conjuge,

    Ov. H. 12, 161; so id. ib. 5, 75; id. M. 1, 747; Verg. A. 1, 274; Hor. C. 2, 4, 9; 1, 6, 2;

    and in prose,

    Quint. 3, 4, 2; Sen. Contr. 2, 1; Curt. 6, 7, 8; cf. Rudd. II. p. 212; Zumpt ad Quint. V. p. 122 Spalding.—Hence the adverbial phrase a se=uph heautou, sua sponte, of one's own uccord, spontaneously:

    ipsum a se oritur et sua sponte nascitur,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 24, 78:

    (urna) ab se cantat quoja sit,

    Plaut. Rud. 2, 5, 21 (al. eapse; cf. id. Men. 1, 2, 66); so Col. 11, 1, 5; Liv. 44, 33, 6.
    b.
    With names of towns to denote origin, extraction, instead of gentile adjectives. From, of:

    pastores a Pergamide,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 1:

    Turnus ab Aricia,

    Liv. 1, 50, 3 (for which Aricinus, id. 1, 51, 1):

    obsides dant trecentos principum a Cora atque Pometia liberos,

    Liv. 2, 22, 2; and poet.: O longa mundi servator ab Alba, Auguste, thou who art descended from the old Alban race of kings (=oriundus, or ortus regibus Albanis), Prop. 5, 6, 37.
    c.
    In giving the etymology of a name: eam rem (sc. legem, Gr. nomon) illi Graeco putant nomine a suum cuique tribuendo appellatam, ego nostro a legendo, Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 19: annum intervallum regni fuit: id ab re... interregnum appellatum, Liv. 1, 17, 6:

    (sinus maris) ab nomine propinquae urbis Ambracius appellatus,

    id. 38, 4, 3; and so Varro in his Ling. Lat., and Pliny, in Books 1-5 of H. N., on almost every page. (Cf. also the arts. ex and de.)
    d.
    With verbs of beginning and repeating: a summo bibere, in Plaut. to drink in succession from the one at the head of the table:

    da, puere, ab summo,

    Plaut. As. 5, 2, 41; so,

    da ab Delphio cantharum circum, id Most. 1, 4, 33: ab eo nobis causa ordienda est potissimum,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 7, 21:

    coepere a fame mala,

    Liv. 4, 12, 7:

    cornicem a cauda de ovo exire,

    tail-foremost, Plin. 10, 16, 18:

    a capite repetis, quod quaerimus,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 18 al.
    e.
    With verbs of freeing from, defending, or protecting against any thing:

    a foliis et stercore purgato,

    Cato, R. R. 65 (66), 1:

    tantumne ab re tuast oti tibi?

    Ter. Heaut. 1, [p. 4] 1, 23; cf.:

    Saguntini ut a proeliis quietem habuerant,

    Liv. 21, 11, 5:

    expiandum forum ab illis nefarii sceleris vestigiis,

    Cic. Rab. Perd. 4, 11:

    haec provincia non modo a calamitate, sed etiam a metu calamitatis est defendenda,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 6, 14 (v. defendo):

    ab incendio urbem vigiliis munitam intellegebat,

    Sall. C. 32:

    ut neque sustinere se a lapsu possent,

    Liv. 21, 35, 12:

    ut meam domum metueret atque a me ipso caveret,

    Cic. Sest. 64, 133.
    f.
    With verbs of expecting, fearing, hoping, and the like, ab =a parte, as, Cic. Att. 9, 7, 4: cum eadem metuam ab hac parte, since I fear the same from this side; hence, timere, metuere ab aliquo, not, to be afraid of any one, but, to fear something (proceeding from) from him:

    el metul a Chryside,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 79; cf.:

    ab Hannibale metuens,

    Liv. 23, 36; and:

    metus a praetore,

    id. 23, 15, 7;

    v. Weissenb. ad h. l.: a quo quidem genere, judices, ego numquam timui,

    Cic. Sull. 20, 59:

    postquam nec ab Romanis robis ulla est spes,

    you can expect nothing from the Romans, Liv. 21, 13, 4.
    g.
    With verbs of fastening and holding:

    funiculus a puppi religatus,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 51, 154:

    cum sinistra capillum ejus a vertice teneret,

    Q. Cic. Pet. Cons. 3.
    h.
    Ulcisci se ab aliquo, to take vengeance on one:

    a ferro sanguis humanus se ulciscitur,

    Plin. 34, 14, 41 fin.
    i.
    Cognoscere ab aliqua re to knoio or learn by means of something (different from ab aliquo, to learn from some one):

    id se a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cognovisse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 22.
    j.
    Dolere, laborare, valere ab, instead of the simple abl.:

    doleo ab animo, doleo ab oculis, doleo ab aegritudine,

    Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 62:

    a morbo valui, ab animo aeger fui,

    id. Ep. 1, 2, 26; cf. id. Aul. 2, 2, 9:

    a frigore et aestu ne quid laborent,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 17; so,

    a frigore laborantibus,

    Plin. 32, 10, 46, § 133; cf.:

    laborare ab re frumentaria,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 10, 1; id. B. C. 3, 9; v. laboro.
    k.
    Where verbs and adjectives are joined with ab, instead of the simple abl., ab defines more exactly the respect in which that which is expressed by the verb or adj. is to be understood, in relation to, with regard to, in respect to, on the part of:

    ab ingenio improbus,

    Plaut. Truc. 4, 3, 59:

    a me pudica'st,

    id. Curc. 1, 1, 51:

    orba ab optimatibus contio,

    Cic. Fl. 23, 54; ro Ov. H. 6,156: securos vos ab hac parte reddemus, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 24 fin. (v. securus):

    locus copiosus a frumento,

    Cic. Att. 5, 18, 2; cf.:

    sumus imparati cum a militibas tum a pecunia,

    id. ib. 7, 15 fin.:

    ille Graecus ab omni laude felicior,

    id. Brut. 16, 63:

    ab una parte haud satis prosperuin,

    Liv. 1, 32, 2 al.;

    so often in poets ab arte=arte,

    artfully, Tib. 1, 5, 4; 1, 9, 66; Ov. Am. 2, 4, 30.
    l.
    In the statement of the motive instead of ex, propter, or the simple abl. causae, from, out of, on account of, in consequence of: ab singulari amore scribo, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 7, B fin.:

    linguam ab irrisu exserentem,

    thrusting out the tongue in derision, Liv. 7, 10, 5:

    ab honore,

    id. 1, 8; so, ab ira, a spe, ab odio, v. Drak. ad Liv. 24, 30, 1: 26, 1, 3; cf. also Kritz and Fabri ad Sall. J. 31, 3, and Fabri ad Liv. 21, 36, 7.
    m.
    Especially in the poets instead of the gen.:

    ab illo injuria,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 129:

    fulgor ab auro,

    Lucr. 2, 5:

    dulces a fontibus undae,

    Verg. G. 2, 243.
    n.
    In indicating a part of the whole, for the more usual ex, of, out of:

    scuto ab novissimis uni militi detracto,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:

    nonnuill ab novissimis,

    id. ib.; Cic. Sest. 65, 137; cf. id. ib. 59 fin.: a quibus (captivis) ad Senatum missus (Regulus).
    o.
    In marking that from which any thing proceeds, and to which it belongs:

    qui sunt ab ea disciplina,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 3, 7:

    ab eo qui sunt,

    id. Fin. 4, 3, 7:

    nostri illi a Platone et Aristotele aiunt,

    id. Mur. 30, 63 (in imitation of oi upo tinos).
    p.
    To designate an office or dignity (with or without servus; so not freq. till after the Aug. period;

    in Cic. only once): Pollex, servus a pedibus meus,

    one of my couriers, Cic. Att. 8, 5, 1; so,

    a manu servus,

    a secretary, Suet. Caes. 74: Narcissum ab eplstulis ( secretary) et Pallantem a rationibus ( accountant), id. Claud. 28; and so, ab actis, ab admissione, ab aegris, ab apotheca, ab argento, a balneis, a bibliotheca, a codicillis, a jumentis, a potione, etc. (v. these words and Inscr. Orell. vol. 3, Ind. xi. p. 181 sq.).
    q.
    The use of ab before adverbs is for the most part peculiar to later Latinity:

    a peregre,

    Vitr. 5, 7 (6), 8:

    a foris,

    Plin. 17, 24, 37; Vulg. Gen, 7, 16; ib. Matt. 23, 27:

    ab intus,

    ib. ib. 7, 15:

    ab invicem,

    App. Herb. 112; Vulg. Matt. 25, 32; Cypr. Ep. 63, 9: Hier. Ep. 18:

    a longe,

    Hyg. Fab. 257; Vulg. Gen. 22, 4; ib. Matt. 26, 58:

    a modo,

    ib. ib. 23, 39;

    Hier. Vit. Hilar.: a nune,

    Vulg. Luc. 1, 48:

    a sursum,

    ib. Marc. 15, 38.
    ► a.
    Ab is not repeated like most other prepositions (v. ad, ex, in, etc.) with pron. interrog. or relat. after subst. and pron. demonstr. with ab:

    Arsinoen, Stratum, Naupactum...fateris ab hostibus esse captas. Quibus autem hostibus? Nempe iis, quos, etc.,

    Cic. Pis. 37, 91:

    a rebus gerendis senectus abstrahit. Quibus? An iis, quae in juventute geruntur et viribus?

    id. Sen. 6:

    a Jove incipiendum putat. Quo Jove?

    id. Rep. 1, 36, 56:

    res publica, quascumque vires habebit, ab iis ipsis, quibus tenetur, de te propediem impetrabit,

    id. Fam. 4, 13, 5.—
    b.
    Ab in Plantus is once put after the word which it governs: quo ab, As. 1, 1, 106.—
    c.
    It is in various ways separated from the word which it governs:

    a vitae periculo,

    Cic. Brut. 91, 313:

    a nullius umquam me tempore aut commodo,

    id. Arch. 6, 12:

    a minus bono,

    Sall. C. 2, 6:

    a satis miti principio,

    Liv. 1, 6, 4:

    damnis dives ab ipsa suis,

    Ov. H. 9, 96; so id. ib. 12, 18; 13, 116.—
    d.
    The poets join a and que, making aque; but in good prose que is annexed to the following abl. (a meque, abs teque, etc.):

    aque Chao,

    Verg. G. 4, 347:

    aque mero,

    Ov. M. 3, 631:

    aque viro,

    id. H. 6, 156:

    aque suis,

    id. Tr. 5, 2, 74 al. But:

    a meque,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 16, 1:

    abs teque,

    id. Att. 3, 15, 4:

    a teque,

    id. ib. 8, 11, §

    7: a primaque adulescentia,

    id. Brut. 91, 315 al. —
    e.
    A Greek noun joined with ab stands in the dat.: a parte negotiati, hoc est pragmatikê, removisse, Quint. 3, 7, 1.
    III.
    In composition ab,
    1.
    Retains its original signif.: abducere, to take or carry away from some place: abstrahere, to draw auay; also, downward: abicere, to throw down; and denoting a departure from the idea of the simple word, it has an effect apparently privative: absimilis, departing from the similar, unlike: abnormis, departing from the rule, unusual (different from dissimilis, enormis); and so also in amens=a mente remotus, alienus ( out of one's senses, without self-control, insane): absurdus, missounding, then incongruous, irrational: abutor (in one of its senses), to misuse: aborior, abortus, to miscarry: abludo; for the privative force the Latin regularly employs in-, v. 2. in.—
    2.
    It more rarely designates completeness, as in absorbere, abutor ( to use up). (The designation of the fourth generation in the ascending or descending line by ab belongs here only in appearance; as abavus for quartus pater, great-great-grandfather, although the Greeks introduced upopappos; for the immutability of the syllable ab in abpatrnus and abmatertera, as well as the signif. Of the word abavus, grandfather's grandfather, imitated in abnepos, grandchild's grandchild, seems to point to a derivation from avi avus, as Festus, p. 13 Mull., explains atavus, by atta avi, or, rather, attae avus.)

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > ab

  • 2 καί

    καί conjunction (Hom.+), found most frequently by far of all Gk. particles in the NT; since it is not only used much more commonly here than in other Gk. lit. but oft. in a different sense, or rather in different circumstances, it contributes greatly to some of the distinctive coloring of the NT style.—HMcArthur, ΚΑΙ Frequency in Greek Letters, NTS 15, ’68/69, 339–49. The vivacious versatility of κ. (for earlier Gk. s. Denniston 289–327) can easily be depressed by the tr. ‘and’, whose repetition in a brief area of text lacks the support of arresting aspects of Gk. syntax.
    ① marker of connections, and
    ⓐ single words
    α. gener. Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ Ἰούδας Mt 13:55. χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν 2:11. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή Ro 7:12. πολυμερῶς κ. πολυτρόπως Hb 1:1. ὁ θεὸς κ. πατήρ God, who is also the Father 1 Cor 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; Js 1:27; 3:9 al.—Connects two occurrences of the same word for emphasis (OGI 90, 19 [196 B.C.] Ἑρμῆς ὁ μέγας κ. μέγας; pap in Mayser II/1, 54) μείζων κ. μείζων greater and greater Hv 4, 1, 6. ἔτι κ. ἔτι again and again B 21:4; Hs 2, 6 (B-D-F §493, 1; 2; s. Rob. 1200).
    β. w. numerals, w. the larger number first δέκα καὶ ὁκτώ Lk 13:16. τεσσεράκοντα κ. ἕξ J 2:20. τετρακόσιοι κ. πεντήκοντα Ac 13:20.—The καί in 2 Cor 13:1 ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα=‘or’ ([v.l. ἢ τριῶν for καὶ τριῶν as it reads Mt 18:16]; cp. Js 4:13 v.l. σήμερον καὶ αὔριον=‘today or tomorrow’, but s. above all Thu. 1, 82, 2; Pla., Phd. 63e; X., De Re Equ. 4, 4 ἁμάξας τέτταρας καὶ πέντε; Heraclides, Pol. 58 τρεῖς καὶ τέσσαρας; Polyb. 3, 51, 12 ἐπὶ δυεῖν καὶ τρισὶν ἡμέραις; 5, 90, 6; Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 2, 28 εἷς καὶ δύο=one or two; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1091 p. 305, 22 W. τριέτης καὶ τετραέτης) by the statement of two or three witnesses every charge must be sustained, as explained by Dt 19:15.
    γ. adding the whole to the part and in general (Aristoph., Nub. 1239 τὸν Δία καὶ τοὺς θεούς; Thu. 1, 116, 3; 7, 65, 1) Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι Peter and the rest of the apostles Ac 5:29. οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς κ. τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον the high priest and all the rest of the council Mt 26:59. Vice versa, adding a (specially important) part to the whole and especially (πᾶς Ἰουδὰ καὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ 2 Ch 35:24; cp. 32, 33; 1 Macc 2:6) τοῖς μαθηταῖς κ. τῷ Πέτρῳ Mk 16:7. σὺν γυναιξὶ κ. Μαριάμ Ac 1:14.
    δ. The expr. connected by καί can be united in the form of a hendiadys (Alcaeus 117, 9f D.2 χρόνος καὶ καρπός=time of fruit; Soph., Aj. 144; 749; Polyb. 6, 9, 4; 6, 57, 5 ὑπεροχὴ καὶ δυναστεία=1, 2, 7; 5, 45, 1 ὑπεροχὴ τῆς δυναστείας; Diod S 5, 67, 3 πρὸς ἀνανέωσιν καὶ μνήμην=renewal of remembrance; 15, 63, 2 ἀνάγκη καὶ τύχη=compulsion of fate; 16, 93, 2 ἐπιβουλὴ κ. θάνατος=a fatal plot; Jos., Ant. 12, 98 μετὰ χαρᾶς κ. βοῆς=w. a joyful cry; 17, 82 ἀκρίβεια κ. φυλακή) ἐξίσταντο ἐπὶ τῇ συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσιν αὐτοῦ they were amazed at his intelligent answers Lk 2:47. δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα κ. σοφίαν I will give you wise utterance 21:15. τροφὴ κ. εὐφροσύνη joy concerning (your) food Ac 14:17. ἐλπὶς κ. ἀνάστασις hope of a resurrection 23:6 (2 Macc 3:29 ἐλπὶς καὶ σωτηρία; s. OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f; GBjörck, ConNeot 4, ’40, 1–4).
    ε. A colloquial feature is the coordination of two verbs, one of which should be a ptc. (s. B-D-F §471; Rob. 1135f) ἀποτολμᾷ κ. λέγει = ἀποτολμῶν λέγει he is so bold as to say Ro 10:20. ἔσκαψεν κ. ἐβάθυνεν (=βαθύνας) Lk 6:48. ἐκρύβη κ. ἐξῆλθεν (=ἐξελθών) J 8:59. Sim. χαίρων κ. βλέπων I am glad to see Col 2:5. Linking of subordinate clause and ptc. Μαριὰμ ὡς ἦλθεν … καὶ ἰδοῦσα J 11:32 v.l. Cp. παραλαβών … καὶ ἀνέβη Lk 9:28 v.l.
    ⓑ clauses and sentences
    α. gener.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει κ. τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). εἰσῆλθον … κ. ἐδίδασκον Ac 5:21. διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ κ. συνάξει τὸν σῖτον Mt 3:12. κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία Ro 4:14 and very oft. Connecting two questions Mt 21:23, or quotations (e.g. Ac 1:20), and dialogue (Lk 21:8), or alternate possibilities (13:18).
    β. Another common feature is the practice, drawn fr. Hebrew or fr. the speech of everyday life, of using κ. as a connective where more discriminating usage would call for other particles: καὶ εἶδον καὶ (for ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο Rv 6:12. καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς … καὶ (for ὅτι) ἔλεγον and the king learned that they were saying Mk 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92; on this JBlinzler, Philol. 96, ’43/44, 119–31). τέξεται υἱὸν καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (for οὗ τὸ ὄνομα καλ.) Mt 1:21; cp. Lk 6:6; 11:44. καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς Mk 9:5. Esp. freq. is the formula in historical narrative καὶ ἐγένετο … καὶ (like וַ … וַיְהִי) and it happened or came about … that Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15; Lk 5:1 v.l. (for ἐγένετο δὲ … καὶ; so also the text of 6:12), 12, 17; 14:1; 17:11 al. (Gen 7:10 al.; JosAs 11:1; 22:1). S. MJohannessohn, Das bibl. Καὶ ἐγένετο u. seine Geschichte, 1926 (fr. ZVS 35, 1925, 161–212); KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 29–62; Mlt-Turner 334f; ÉDelebecque, Études Grecques sur L’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65; JVoelz, The Language of the NT: ANRW II/25/2, 893–977, esp. 959–64.—As in popular speech, κ. is used in rapid succession Mt 14:9ff; Mk 1:12ff; Lk 18:32ff; J 2:13ff; 1 Cor 12:5f; Rv 6:12ff; 9:1ff. On this kind of colloquial speech, which joins independent clauses rather than subordinating one to the other (parataxis rather than hypotaxis) s. B-D-F §458; Rdm.2 p. 222; Rob. 426; Dssm., LO 105ff (LAE 129ff), w. many references and parallels fr. secular sources. This is a favorite, e.g., in Polyaenus 2, 3, 2–4; 2, 4, 3; 3, 9, 10; 3, 10, 2; 4, 6, 1; 7, 36 al.
    γ. It is also coordination rather than subordination when κ. connects an expr. of time with that which occurs in the time (Od. 5, 362; Hdt. 7, 217; Thu. 1, 50, 5; Pla., Symp. 220c; Aeschin. 3, 71 νὺξ ἐν μέσῳ καὶ παρῆμεν; s. B-D-F §442, 4; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griechische Gramm. 1913, 640*): ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα κ. παραδίδοται the time has come when he is to be given up Mt 26:45. κ. ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν when they crucified him Mk 15:25. κ. ἀνέβη εἰς Ἰεροσόλυμα when he went up to Jerusalem J 2:13. κ. συντελέσω when I will make Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); cp. J 4:35; 7:33; Lk 19:43; 23:44; Ac 5:7.
    δ. καί introducing an apodosis is really due to Hebr./LXX infl. (B-D-F §442, 7; Abel §78a, 6 p. 341; Mlt-H. 422; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 66–72; but not offensive to ears trained in good Gk.: s. Il. 1, 478; Hdt. 1, 79, 2; sim.Thu. 2, 93, 4 ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐχώρουν εὐθύς; 8, 27, 5; Herm. Wr. 13, 1 …, καὶ ἔφης; Delebecque [s. above in β] 130–32) καὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ …, κ. ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 3:20. Also κ. ἰδού in an apodosis Lk 7:12; Ac 1:10.
    ε. connecting negative and affirmative clauses Lk 3:14. οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις κ. τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ you have no bucket, and the well is deep J 4:11; cp. 3J 10 (οὔτε … καί Eur., Iph. Taur. 591f; Longus, Past. 1, 17; 4, 28; Aelian, NA 1, 57; 11, 9; Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 2, 4 οὔτε πάντα ἡ Λεσβία, Δωρί, πρὸς σὲ ἐψεύσατο καὶ σὺ τἀληθῆ ἀπήγγελκας Μυρτίῳ ‘It wasn’t all lies that Lesbia told you, Doris; and you certainly reported the truth to Myrtium’). After a negative clause, which influences the clause beginning w. καί: μήποτε καταπατήσουσιν … κ. στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς Mt 7:6; cp. 5:25; 10:38; 13:15 (Is 6:10); 27:64; Lk 12:58; 21:34; J 6:53; 12:40 (Is 6:10); Ac 28:27 (Is 6:10); 1 Th 3:5; Hb 12:15; Rv 16:15.
    ζ. to introduce a result that comes fr. what precedes: and then, and so Mt 5:15; 23:32; Mk 8:34; 2 Cor 11:9; Hb 3:19; 1J 3:19. καὶ ἔχομεν and so we have 2 Pt 1:19. Esp. after the impv., or expr. of an imperatival nature (Soph., Oed. Col. 1410ff θέσθε … καὶ … οἴσει, El. 1207; Sir 2:6; 3:17) δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου καὶ ποιήσω and then I will make Mt 4:19. εἰπὲ λόγῳ, κ. ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου speak the word, and then my servant will be cured Mt 8:8; Lk 7:7; cp. Mt 7:7; Mk 6:22; Lk 10:28; J 14:16; Js 4:7, 10; Rv 4:1.—καί introduces a short clause that confirms the existence of someth. that ought to be: ἵνα τέκνα θεοῦ κληθῶμεν, καὶ ἐσμέν that we should be called children of God; and so we really are (καλέω 1d) 1J 3:1 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §161 they were to conquer Sardinia, καὶ κατέλαβον=and they really took it; 4, 127 §531 one day would decide [κρίνειν] the fate of Rome, καὶ ἐκρίθη).
    η. emphasizing a fact as surprising or unexpected or noteworthy: and yet, and in spite of that, nevertheless (Eur., Herc. Fur. 509; Philostrat., Her. 11 [II 184, 29 Kayser] ῥητορικώτατον καὶ δεινόν; Longus, Past. 4, 17 βουκόλος ἦν Ἀγχίσης καὶ ἔσχεν αὐτὸν Ἀφροδίτη) κ. σὺ ἔρχῃ πρὸς μέ; and yet you come to me? Mt 3:14; cp. 6:26; 10:29; Mk 12:12; J 1:5, 10; 3:11, 32; 5:40; 6:70; 7:28; 1 Cor 5:2; 2 Cor 6:9; Hb 3:9 (Ps 94:9); Rv 3:1. So also, connecting what is unexpected or otherw. noteworthy with an attempt of some kind (JBlomqvist, Das sogennante και adversativum ’79): but ζητεῖ κ. οὐχ εὑρίσκει but he finds none (no resting place) Mt 12:43. ἐπεθύμησαν ἰδεῖν κ. οὐχ εἶδαν but did not see (it) 13:17; cp. 26:60; Lk 13:7; 1 Th 2:18. Cp. GJs 18:3 (not pap). Perhaps Mk 5:20. Introducing a contrasting response καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι Hv 2, 1, 3.
    θ. to introduce an abrupt question, which may often express wonder, ill-will, incredulity, etc. (B-D-F §442, 8. For older lit. exx. of this usage s. Kühner-G. II p. 247f; for later times EColwell, The Gk. of the Fourth Gospel ’31, 87f): κ. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο; how have I deserved this? Lk 1:43. κ. τίς; who then? Mk 10:26; Lk 10:29; J 9:36. καὶ τί γέγονεν ὅτι … ; how does it happen that … ? 14:22. καὶ πῶς σὺ λέγεις … ; how is it, then, that you say … J 14:9 v.l. W. a protasis εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, κ. τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με; for if I make you sad, who then will cheer me up? 2 Cor 2:2 (cp. Ps.-Clem., Hom. 2, 43; 44 εἰ [ὁ θεὸς] ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει;). Thus Phil 1:22 is prob. to be punctuated as follows (s. ADebrunner, GGA 1926, 151): εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, τοῦτο μοι καρπὸς ἔργου, καὶ τί αἱρήσομαι; οὐ γνωρίζω but if living on here means further productive work, then which shall I choose? I really don’t know. καὶ πῶς αὐτοῦ υἱός ἐστιν; how, then, is he his son? Lk 20:44 (cp. Gen 39:9).
    ι. to introduce a parenthesis (Eur., Orest. 4, Hel. 393; X., Equ. 11, 2.—B-D-F §465, 1; Rob. 1182) κ. ἐκωλύθην ἄρχι τοῦ δεῦρο but so far I have been prevented Ro 1:13.
    ⓒ oft. explicative; i.e., a word or clause is connected by means of καί w. another word or clause, for the purpose of explaining what goes before it and so, that is, namely (PPetr II, 18 [1], 9 πληγὰς … καὶ πλείους=blows … indeed many of them.—Kühner-G. II 247; B-D-F §442, 9; Rob. 1181; Mlt-Turner 335) χάριν κ. ἀποστολήν grace, that is, the office of an apostle Ro 1:5. ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα καὶ τὰ τ. δαιμονιζομένων they told everything, namely what had happened to those who were possessed Mt 8:33. καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος that is, grace upon grace J 1:16. Cp. 1 Cor 3:5; 15:38.—Mt 21:5.—Other explicative uses are καὶ οὗτος, καὶ τοῦτο, καὶ ταῦτα (the first and last are in earlier Gk.: Hdt., X. et al.; s. Kühner-G. I 647; II 247) and, also ascensive and indeed, and at that Ἰ. Χρ., καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον J. Chr., (and) indeed him on the cross 1 Cor 2:2. καὶ τοῦτο Ro 13:11; 1 Cor 6:6, 8; Eph 2:8. καὶ ταῦτα w. ptc. and to be sure Hb 11:12. See B-D-F §290, 5; 425, 1; 442, 9.—The ascensive force of καί is also plain in Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον a Roman citizen, and uncondemned at that Ac 22:25. ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐστιν an hour is coming, indeed it is already here J 5:25. προσέθηκεν καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ πᾶσιν καὶ κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ added this on top of everything else, namely to put John in prison Lk 3:20.
    ⓓ After πολύς and before a second adj. καί is pleonastic fr. the viewpoint of modern lang. (earlier Gk.: Hom. et al. [Kühner-G. II 252, 1]; cp. Cebes 1, 1 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα ἀναθήματα; 2, 3; B-D-F §442, 11) πολλὰ … κ. ἄλλα σημεῖα many other signs J 20:30 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 318). πολλὰ κ. βαρέα αἰτιώματα many severe charges Ac 25:7. πολλὰ … καὶ ἕτερα Lk 3:18 (cp. Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 6 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα). πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι Tit 1:10.
    ⓔ introducing someth. new, w. loose connection: Mt 4:23; 8:14, 23, 28; 9:1, 9, 27, 35; 10:1; 12:27; Mk 5:1, 21; Lk 8:26; J 1:19 and oft.
    ⓕ καί … καί both … and, not only …, but also (Synes., Dreams 10 p. 141b καὶ ἀπιστεῖν ἔξεστι καὶ πιστεύειν.—B-D-F §444, 3; Rob. 1182; Mlt-Turner 335) connecting single expressions Mt 10:28; Mk 4:41; Ro 11:33; Phil 2:13; 4:12. κ. ἐν ὀλίγῳ κ. ἐν μεγάλῳ Ac 26:29. κ. ἅπαξ κ. δίς (s. ἅπαξ 1) Phil 4:16; 1 Th 2:18. Connecting whole clauses or sentences: Mk 9:13; J 7:28; 9:37; 12:28; 1 Cor 1:22. Introducing contrasts: although … yet (Anthol. VII, 676 Δοῦλος Ἐπίκτητος γενόμην καὶ σῶμʼ ἀνάπηρος καὶ πενίην ῏Ιρος καὶ φίλος ἀθανάτοις ‘I was Epictetus, a slave; crippled in body and an Iros [a beggar in Hom., Od.] in poverty, but dear to the Immortals’) J 15:24; Ac 23:3. καὶ … κ. οὐ Lk 5:36; J 6:36. καὶ οὐ … καί 17:25; κ. … κ. now … now Mk 9:22. On τὲ … καί s. τέ 2c. Somet. w. ἤ q.v. 1aβ.—HCadbury, Superfluous καί in the Lord’s Prayer (i.e. Mt 6:12) and Elsewhere: Munera Studiosa (=WHatch Festschr.) ’46.
    ② marker to indicate an additive relation that is not coordinate to connect clauses and sentences, also, likewise, funct. as an adv.
    ⓐ simply κ. τὴν ἄλλην the other one also Mt 5:39; cp. vs. 40; 6:21; 12:45; Mk 1:38; 2:26; 8:7 and oft. Freq. used w. pronouns κἀγώ (q.v.). καὶ σύ Mt 26:73. κ. ὑμεῖς 20:4, 7; Lk 21:31; J 7:47 and oft. κ. αὐτός (s. αὐτός 1f).
    ⓑ intensive: even Mt 5:46f; 10:30; Mk 1:27; Lk 10:17; J 14:9 v.l.; Ac 5:39; 22:28; Ro 9:24 (ἀλλὰ καί); 1 Cor 2:10; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 2:17; Eph 5:12; Phlm 21; Hb 7:25; 1 Pt 4:19 (but s. d below); Jd 23; Hs 5, 2, 10; 7:1; ἔτι καὶ νῦν Dg 2:3. CBlackman, JBL 87, ’68, 203f would transl. Ro 3:26b: … even in the act of declaring righteous (cp. the gen. abs. Polemon Soph. B 14 Reader καὶ Δάτιδος ἀποπλέοντος=even though Datis was sailing away). In formulas expressing a wish: ὄφελον καί if only, would that Gal 5:12. In connection w. a comparative: κ. περισσότερον προφήτου one who is even more than a prophet Mt 11:9. κ. μείζονα ποιήσει J 14:12.
    ⓒ In sentences denoting a contrast καί appears in var. ways, somet. in both members of the comparison, and oft. pleonastically, to our way of thinking καθάπερ …, οὕτως καί as …, thus also 2 Cor 8:11. ὥσπερ …, οὕτως καί (Hyperid. 1, 2, 5–8) Ro 5:19; 11:30f; 1 Cor 11:12; 15:22; Gal 4:29. ὡς …, οὕτως καί Ro 5:15, 18. ὸ̔ν τρόπον …, οὕτως καί 2 Ti 3:8.—οὕτως καί thus also Ro 6:11. ὡσαύτως καί in the same way also 1 Cor 11:25. ὁμοίως καί (Jos., Bell. 2, 575) J 6:11; Jd 8. ὡς καί Ac 11:17; 1 Cor 7:7; 9:5. καθὼς καί Ro 15:7; 1 Cor 13:12; 2 Cor 1:14; Eph 4:17. καθάπερ καί Ro 4:6; 2 Cor 1:14.—καί can also stand alone in the second member w. the mng. so also, so. ὡς … καί Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20. καθὼς … καί Lk 6:31 v.l.; J 6:57; 13:15; 1 Cor 15:49.—οἷος …, τοιοῦτος καί 1 Cor 15:48. After a comp. ὅσῳ καί by so much also Hb 8:6. καί is found in both members of the comparison (s. Kühner-G. II 256; 2 Macc 2:10; 6:14) Ro 1:13; 1 Th 2:14. καθὼς καὶ … οὕτως καί Col 3:13 (cp. Hyperid. 1, 40, 20–25 ὥσπερ καὶ … οὕτω καί; 3, 38).
    ⓓ w. expressions that introduce cause or result, here also pleonastic to a considerable degree διὰ τοῦτο καί for this reason (also) Lk 11:49; J 12:18. διὸ καί Lk 1:35; Ac 10:29; Ro 4:22; Hb 13:12. εἰς τοῦτο καί 2 Cor 2:9. ὥστε καί 1 Pt 4:19 (but this pass. may well fit in b). ὅθεν καί Hb 7:25; 11:19.
    ⓔ after an interrogative (as Thu., X., et al.; s. Kühner-G. II 255. S. also B-D-F §442, 14) at all, still ἱνατί καὶ τ. γῆν καταργεῖ; Lk 13:7. τί καί; (Hyperid. 3, 14 τί καὶ ἀδικεῖ; what kind of wrong, then, is he committing?) τί καὶ ἐλπίζει; why does he still (need to) hope? Ro 8:24. v.l. τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; why are they baptized (at all)? 1 Cor 15:29; cp. vs. 30.
    ⓕ used w. a relative, it oft. gives greater independence to the foll. relative clause: Mk 3:14; Lk 10:30; J 11:2 v.l.; Ac 1:3, 11; 7:45; 10:39; 11:30; 12:4; 13:22; 28:10; Ro 9:24; 1 Cor 11:23; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29 al.
    ⓖ used pleonastically w. prep.
    α. μετά (BGU 412, 6 μετὰ καὶ τ. υἱοῦ) Phil 4:3.
    β. σύν (ins in PASA III 612; PFay 108; BGU 179, 19; 515, 17) 1 Cl 65:1.—Dssm., NB 93 (BS 265f).
    ⓗ w. double names ὁ καί who is also called … (the earliest ex. in a fragment of Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 15, 51 p. 469, 23 Jac. ῏Ωχος καὶ Δαρειαῖος [s. Hatch 141]; OGI 565; 574; 583; 589; 603; 604; 620; 623; 636; POxy 45; 46; 54; 101; 485; 1279; PFay 30; BGU 22, 25; 36, 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 240; 5, 85; 12, 285; 13, 320; 18, 35. Further material in WSchmid, Der Atticismus III 1893, 338; Dssm., B 181ff [BS 313–17]. Lit. in B-D-F §268, 1) Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9. Ἰγνάτιος, ὁ καὶ Θεοφόρος ins of all the letters of Ign.
    ⓘ with other particles
    α. καὶ γάρ for (s. γάρ 1b).—καὶ γὰρ … ἀλλά (or granted that … but) 2 Cor 13:4; Phil 2:27.—καὶ γὰρ οὐ(κ): neither 1 Cor 11:9; for even … not 2 Cor 3:10.
    β. καί γε (without intervening word [opp. earlier Gk, e.g. Pla., Phd. 58d; Rep. 7, 531a]: Hippocr., Septim. 9, VII 450 Littré; Cornutus p. 40, 12; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; Rhetor Apsines [III A.D.] p. 332, 17 Hammer; TestReub 4:4 al.; for גָּם always in Theod. [DBarthélemy, Les devanciers d’Aquila ’63, 31ff]), weakened force: (if) only or at least Lk 19:42 v.l.; intensive: indeed (Jos. Ant 29, 19) Ac 2:18 (J 3:2 v.l.; Mel., P. 30, 207); Hm 8:5; 9:9. καί γε οὐ μακράν= and indeed God is not far Ac 17:27.—Kühner-G. II 176b; Schwyzer II 561; B-D-F §439, 2; Rdm.2 35–37.
    γ. καὶ … δέ and also, but also (s. δέ 5b).
    δ. καίτοι (Il. 13, 267 et al., ins, pap; 4 Macc 2:6; 5:18; 7:13; Ath. 8, 1 al.; Mel., P. 58, 422) particle (B-D-F §425, 1; 450, 3; Rob. 1129 and 1154) w. finite verb (Chion, Ep. 3, 1; Jos. Ant. 5, 78) yet, on the other hand Ac 14:17. W. gen. abs. foll. (BGU 850, 4 [76 A.D.] καίτοι ἐμοῦ σε πολλὰ ἐρωτήσαντος; 898, 26; Philo, Vi. Mos. 1, 20; Jos., Ant. 2, 321; Ath. 19, 2; 25, 2) Hb 4:3.—καίτοι γε or καί τοι γε (since Aristoph., Ach. 611; but esp. in later Gk. [cp. Schwyzer II 561; MMeister, De Aiocho dial., Breslau diss. 1915 p. 31, 5]; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 364b; Jos., Bell. 1, 7, Ant. 5, 36; Epict. 3, 24, 90; Just., A II, 11, 2; D. 7, 3; Ath. 3, 1; 22, 7; SIG 685, 76 and 82 [139 B.C.]) although J 4:2; Ac 14:17 v.l.; Dg 8:3. W. part. foll. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 230; Mel., P. 58, 422) AcPt Ox 849, 18.—Kühner-G. II 151f; B-D-F §439, 1; 450, 3.—For ἀλλὰ κ., δὲ και, ἐὰν κ., εἰ κ., ἢ κ. s. ἀλλά, δέ, ἐάν, εἰ, ἤ.—ERobson, KAI-Configurations in the Gk. NT, 3 vols. diss. Syracuse ’79. LfgrE s.v. καί col. 1273f (lit.). DELG. M-M. EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καί

  • 3 contextus

    1.
    contextus, a, um, Part. and P. a., from contexo.
    2.
    contextus, ūs, m. [contexo], a joining or putting together, a connection (class.; esp. freq. in the trop. signif., and in Quint.).
    I.
    Lit.: corporum, * Lucr. 1, 243:

    aedificiorum,

    the building of, Dig. 39, 2, 15:

    ratis,

    Aus. Per. Odyss. 5.—
    II.
    Trop., connection, coherence (very freq. in Quint.):

    mirabilis est apud illos (sc. Stoicos) contextus rerum: respondent extrema primis, etc.,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 28, 83; cf.:

    in toto quasi contextu orationis,

    id. Part. Or. 23, 82; and:

    rerum ac verborum,

    Quint. 11, 2, 2:

    verborum,

    id. 11, 2, 28; 11, 2, 24:

    sermonis,

    id. 8, 3, 38:

    dicendi,

    id. 10, 7, 26:

    per partes dissolvitur, quod contextu nocet,

    id. 5, 13, 28; 9, 4, 55. historia non tam finitos numeros quam orbem quendam contextumque desiderat, id. 9, 4, 129; cf.

    Ernest. Lex. Techn. p. 90: litterarum,

    the succession of the letters, id. 1, 1, 24 sq.; cf.:

    in contextu operis,

    in the course, Tac. H. 2, 8.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > contextus

  • 4 נון

    נוּן, נוּנָא,m. (contr. of נענע, v. letter ו; cmp. זִיז = זוזו) fish. Targ. Jon. 2:1; a. e.Targ. Lev. 11:17; Deut. 14:17 שלי נונא, v. שָׁלֵינוּנָא.Ned.54b נו״ן סמ״ך עי״ן נ׳ סמא לעינים the succession of the letters Nun, Samekh, ʿAyin serves as an intimation, ‘fish is a remedy for the eyes. Gen. R. s. 11; a. fr.Ab. Zar.39a שפר נ׳ (καλλίχθος) shfar nuna, name of a fish of the genus anthias; קדש נ׳ (ἱερὸς ἰχθύς) Kdash nuna, a name for anthias, called by some קבר נ׳ (Ar. קברנונא, in one w.) Ḳbar nuna (Grave-fish); (for corr. vers., v. Rabb. D. S. a. l. note 70, a. Tosaf. a. l.. Ib. לשפרנונא (Ms. M. in two words).Pl. נוּנִין, נוּנַיָּא, נוּנַיָּיה, נוּנֵי Targ. Deut. 4:18; a. fr.Y.Naz.IX, 57d, v. צְלֵי I.Y.Ned.IV, beg.39c, v. חל; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > נון

  • 5 נונא

    נוּן, נוּנָא,m. (contr. of נענע, v. letter ו; cmp. זִיז = זוזו) fish. Targ. Jon. 2:1; a. e.Targ. Lev. 11:17; Deut. 14:17 שלי נונא, v. שָׁלֵינוּנָא.Ned.54b נו״ן סמ״ך עי״ן נ׳ סמא לעינים the succession of the letters Nun, Samekh, ʿAyin serves as an intimation, ‘fish is a remedy for the eyes. Gen. R. s. 11; a. fr.Ab. Zar.39a שפר נ׳ (καλλίχθος) shfar nuna, name of a fish of the genus anthias; קדש נ׳ (ἱερὸς ἰχθύς) Kdash nuna, a name for anthias, called by some קבר נ׳ (Ar. קברנונא, in one w.) Ḳbar nuna (Grave-fish); (for corr. vers., v. Rabb. D. S. a. l. note 70, a. Tosaf. a. l.. Ib. לשפרנונא (Ms. M. in two words).Pl. נוּנִין, נוּנַיָּא, נוּנַיָּיה, נוּנֵי Targ. Deut. 4:18; a. fr.Y.Naz.IX, 57d, v. צְלֵי I.Y.Ned.IV, beg.39c, v. חל; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > נונא

  • 6 נוּן

    נוּן, נוּנָא,m. (contr. of נענע, v. letter ו; cmp. זִיז = זוזו) fish. Targ. Jon. 2:1; a. e.Targ. Lev. 11:17; Deut. 14:17 שלי נונא, v. שָׁלֵינוּנָא.Ned.54b נו״ן סמ״ך עי״ן נ׳ סמא לעינים the succession of the letters Nun, Samekh, ʿAyin serves as an intimation, ‘fish is a remedy for the eyes. Gen. R. s. 11; a. fr.Ab. Zar.39a שפר נ׳ (καλλίχθος) shfar nuna, name of a fish of the genus anthias; קדש נ׳ (ἱερὸς ἰχθύς) Kdash nuna, a name for anthias, called by some קבר נ׳ (Ar. קברנונא, in one w.) Ḳbar nuna (Grave-fish); (for corr. vers., v. Rabb. D. S. a. l. note 70, a. Tosaf. a. l.. Ib. לשפרנונא (Ms. M. in two words).Pl. נוּנִין, נוּנַיָּא, נוּנַיָּיה, נוּנֵי Targ. Deut. 4:18; a. fr.Y.Naz.IX, 57d, v. צְלֵי I.Y.Ned.IV, beg.39c, v. חל; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > נוּן

  • 7 נוּנָא

    נוּן, נוּנָא,m. (contr. of נענע, v. letter ו; cmp. זִיז = זוזו) fish. Targ. Jon. 2:1; a. e.Targ. Lev. 11:17; Deut. 14:17 שלי נונא, v. שָׁלֵינוּנָא.Ned.54b נו״ן סמ״ך עי״ן נ׳ סמא לעינים the succession of the letters Nun, Samekh, ʿAyin serves as an intimation, ‘fish is a remedy for the eyes. Gen. R. s. 11; a. fr.Ab. Zar.39a שפר נ׳ (καλλίχθος) shfar nuna, name of a fish of the genus anthias; קדש נ׳ (ἱερὸς ἰχθύς) Kdash nuna, a name for anthias, called by some קבר נ׳ (Ar. קברנונא, in one w.) Ḳbar nuna (Grave-fish); (for corr. vers., v. Rabb. D. S. a. l. note 70, a. Tosaf. a. l.. Ib. לשפרנונא (Ms. M. in two words).Pl. נוּנִין, נוּנַיָּא, נוּנַיָּיה, נוּנֵי Targ. Deut. 4:18; a. fr.Y.Naz.IX, 57d, v. צְלֵי I.Y.Ned.IV, beg.39c, v. חל; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > נוּנָא

  • 8 гимны восхождения

    Religion: Abecedarian hymns (Hymns, the lines or divisions of which begin with the letters of the alphabet in regular succession)

    Универсальный русско-английский словарь > гимны восхождения

  • 9 un

    adj.
    one.
    art.
    an, a.
    * * *
    un
    1 a, an
    1 (numeral) one
    2 (indef) some
    ■ un día volverá he'll come some day Table 1 NOTA See also uno,-a/Table 1
    * * *
    1. adj. 2. = una, art.
    a, an
    - unos I
    - unas I
    * * *
    un, -a
    1. ART INDEF
    1) [en singular] [refiriéndose a algo no conocido o de forma imprecisa] a; [antes de vocal o de h] an; [dando mayor énfasis, con expresiones temporales] one
    2) [en plural]
    a) [uso indefinido] (=algunos) some; (=pocos) a few

    hay unas cervezas en la nevera — there are a few o some beers in the fridge

    b) [con partes del cuerpo]
    c) [con objetos a pares] some
    d) [con cantidades, cifras] about, around

    había unas 20 personas — there were about o around 20 people, there were some 20 people

    unos 80 dólares — about o around 80 dollars, some 80 dollars

    3) [enfático]

    ¡se dio un golpe...! — he banged himself really hard!

    ¡había una gente más rara...! — there were some real weirdos there! *

    ¡sois unos vagos! — you're so lazy!

    2.
    ADJ [numeral] one

    una excursión de un día — a one-day trip, a day trip

    uno
    * * *
    (pl unos), una (pl unas) articulo
    [the masculine article un is also used before feminine nouns which begin with stressed a or ha e.g. un arma poderosa, un hambre feroz]
    1) (sing) a; (delante de sonido vocálico) an; (pl) some

    tú haces unas preguntas... — you do ask some questions!

    me dio una vergüenza... — I was so embarrassed!

    4) (sing) ( como genérico)
    5) (pl) ( expresando aproximación) about
    * * *
    (pl unos), una (pl unas) articulo
    [the masculine article un is also used before feminine nouns which begin with stressed a or ha e.g. un arma poderosa, un hambre feroz]
    1) (sing) a; (delante de sonido vocálico) an; (pl) some

    tú haces unas preguntas... — you do ask some questions!

    me dio una vergüenza... — I was so embarrassed!

    4) (sing) ( como genérico)
    5) (pl) ( expresando aproximación) about
    * * *
    un2

    Ex: A good example is the British Catalogue of Music Classification.

    * a uno u otro lado de = on either side of.
    * a un paso asombroso = at an astounding pace.
    * cada uno = apiece, each.
    * cambiar de una vez a otra = vary + from time to time.
    * cercano uno del otro = in close proximity.
    * cerca uno del otro = in close proximity.
    * dedicar unos minutos = take + a few minutes.
    * de uno a otro = across.
    * en unos momentos = momentarily, at any moment.
    * estar hecho el uno para el otro = be well suited to each other, be two of a kind, be a right pair.
    * estar un poco anticuado = be some years old.
    * los unos a costa de los otros = at each other's expense.
    * lo uno es tan malo como lo otro = one is as bad as the other.
    * más de unos cuantos + Nombre = not a few + Nombre.
    * ni lo uno ni lo otro = in-between, betwixt and between.
    * por mencionar sólo unos pocos = to name but a few.
    * por mencionar unos pocos = just to name a few.
    * por nombrar sólo unos cuantos = to name only some.
    * pospuesto una y otra vez = ever-postponed.
    * ser complementario el uno del otro = be integral one to another.
    * ser uno de entre varios + Nombre = be one of a number of + Nombre.
    * todos y cada uno = all and sundry, each and everyone.
    * todos y cada uno de = any and every, any and all.
    * tropezar los unos con los otros = trip over + each other.
    * una amplia gama de = a wide band of, a wide variety of, a wide range of, a broad variety of, a broad range of.
    * una amplia variedad de = a broad variety of, a wide range of, a broad range of.
    * una apuesta segura = a sure bet.
    * una avalancha de = a flood of, a flood tide of.
    * un abanico de = a palette of.
    * una bobadita = a little something.
    * una buena alternativa a = the next best thing to.
    * una buena cantidad de = a fair amount of.
    * una buena cosa = a good thing.
    * una buena forma de empezar = a good way to start.
    * una buena parte de = a large measure of, a good deal of, a great deal of.
    * una buena pesca = a good catch.
    * una cadena de = a necklace of.
    * una cadena de + Montañas = a range of + Montañas.
    * una cantidad ingente de = a wealth of.
    * una capa fina de = a skim of.
    * una causa perdida = a dead dog.
    * una cierta cantidad de = a measure of, a proportion of.
    * una clase de = a kind of.
    * una colección desordenada de = a scrapbook of.
    * una combinación de = a mixture of, a mix of, a rollup of.
    * una comparsa de = a cavalcade of.
    * una constelación de = a galaxy of.
    * una convocatoria de = a call for.
    * una cosa no + tener + nada que ver con la otra = one thing + have + nothing to do with the other.
    * una cosita = a little something.
    * una cubeta llena de = a pailful of.
    * una cucharadita de = a teaspoon of.
    * una cuestión de principios = a matter of principle.
    * una cuestión de vida o muerte = a matter of life and death.
    * una desgracia = a crying shame.
    * una de varios = one of a variety of.
    * una diversidad de = a variety of, an array of, a mosaic of, a diversity of, a menu of.
    * una escasez de = a dearth of.
    * una especie de = a kind of.
    * una especie de + Nombre = Nombre + of sorts.
    * una espléndida variedad de = a panoply of.
    * una estaca en el corazón = a stake in the heart.
    * una estructura de = a pattern of.
    * una eternidad = ages and ages (and ages).
    * una fortuna = a king's ransom.
    * una fuente de = a treasure trove of.
    * una gama de = a suite of, a palette of.
    * una gama de posibilidades = a palette of possibilities.
    * una gama muy variada de = a whole gamut of.
    * una gama variada de = a trawling of.
    * una gran = a large measure of.
    * una gran cantidad de = a good deal of, a great deal of, a large degree of, a mass of, a plethora of, a supply of, a vast amount of, a city of, a wealth of, a sea of, a cascade of, an army of, a good many, a huge number of, a great number of, a multitude of, scores of, a host of, a vast corpus of, a whole host of.
    * una gran cantidad y variedad de = a wealth and breadth of.
    * una gran diversidad de = a wide range of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of.
    * una gran experiencia = a wealth of experience.
    * una gran extensión de = a sea of.
    * una gran gama de = a wide range of, a rich tapestry of, a wide band of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of, a broad range of, a whole gamut of.
    * una gran mayoría de = a large proportion of.
    * una gran parte de = a broad population of, a lion's share of.
    * una gran pérdida = a great loss.
    * una gran proporción de = a large proportion of.
    * una gran variedad de = a wide range of, a multiplicity of, a rich tapestry of, a plurality of, a broad variety of, a broad range of, a whole gamut of.
    * una grupo impreciso de = a cloud of.
    * una guía general = a rough guide.
    * una idea general = a rough guide.
    * una inmensa cantidad de = a treasure chest of, a huge number of.
    * una intentona de = attempted.
    * un aire de = an air of, a whiff of.
    * una joya = a little gem.
    * una lotería = hit (and/or) miss.
    * un alto en el camino = a stop on the road, a pit stop on the road.
    * un aluvión de = a flood of, a rash of, a barrage of, a flurry of.
    * una manera de empezar = a foot in the door.
    * un amante = a little something on the side.
    * una mayor variedad de = a wider canvas of.
    * una mejor ocasión = a better time.
    * una mezcla de = a mixture of, a blend of, a mix of, a rollup of.
    * una mina de = a treasure trove of.
    * una mina de información = a mine of information.
    * una mina inagotable de = a treasure house of.
    * una minoría de = a minority of.
    * una minoría selecta = a select few.
    * una miscelánea de = a miscellany of.
    * una misma cosa = one and the same.
    * una montaña de = a mountain of.
    * un amplio espectro de = a broad band of, a broad spectrum of, a wide band of.
    * una muestra variada de = a mosaic of.
    * una mujer de mundo = a woman of the world.
    * una multidud de = a host of.
    * una multiplicidad de = a multiplicity of.
    * una multitud de = a swarm of.
    * una necesidad cada vez mayor = a growing need.
    * una negociación justa = a square deal.
    * una noche tras otra = night after night.
    * una nube de = a haze of, a cloud of, a swarm of.
    * un año tras otro = year after year.
    * una ola de = a wave of, a tide of.
    * una oleada de = an army of, a flurry of, a swell of.
    * una oportunidad casi segura = a sporting chance.
    * una oportunidad como es debido = a fair chance.
    * una oportunidad de triunfar = a fighting chance.
    * una oportunidad única en la vida = once in a lifetime opportunity.
    * una organización de = a pattern of.
    * una palmada en la espalda = a pat on the back.
    * una palmadita en la espala = a pat on the back.
    * una pareja ideal = a match made in heaven.
    * una pareja perfecta = a match made in heaven.
    * una parte de = a share of, a snatch of.
    * una pequeña minoría de = a marginal fringe of.
    * una pérdida constante de = a haemorrhage of.
    * una pila de = a pile of, a stack of, a sackful of, a whole slew of, a raft of, a mass of.
    * una pincelada de = a splash of, a hint of.
    * una pizca de = a dash of, a grain of, a pinch of.
    * una pizca de verdad = a grain of truth.
    * una plena convicción de = a strong sense of.
    * una posibilidad muy remota = a long shot.
    * una primera y última vez = a first and last time.
    * una probabilidad muy alta = a sporting chance.
    * una profusión de = a profusion of.
    * una provisión constante de = a diet of.
    * una racha de = a rash of, a stretch of.
    * una retahíla de = a volley of, a string of.
    * una ristra de = a long tail of, a volley of.
    * un arraigado sentido de = a strong sense of.
    * un arte = a fine art.
    * un arte en extinción = a dying art.
    * un arte que se está perdiendo = a dying art.
    * una salva de = a volley of.
    * una sarta de = a volley of.
    * una sarta de mentiras = a sackful of lies, a pack of lies.
    * unas cuantas ideas = a rough guide.
    * una segunda opinión = a second opinion.
    * una segunda vez = a second time around, a second time.
    * una selecta minoría, una minoría selecta, unos pocos elegidos = a select few.
    * una semblanza de = an air of.
    * una serie de = a choice of, a number of, a range of, a series of, a suite of, an array of, a string of, a pattern of, a stream of, a battery of, a succession of.
    * una serie de + Nombre + organizados por turnos = a rota of + Nombre.
    * un aspecto de = an air of.
    * una sucesión de = a succession of.
    * una tanda de = a flurry of.
    * un ataque de = an access of, a shock of.
    * una tentativa de = attempted.
    * una tira de = a raft of.
    * un atisbo de = a hint of.
    * una tontería = a little something.
    * una tormenta en un vaso de agua = a tempest in a teapot.
    * una última vez = one last time.
    * una única fuente para Algo = one-stop, one-stop shopping, one stop shop.
    * un auténtico infierno = a living hell.
    * una variada gama de = a whole gamut of.
    * una variedad de = a range of, a variety of, an array of, an assortment of, a spectrum of, a menu of, a diversity of, a palette of.
    * una variedad muy rica de = a treasure of.
    * una vasta cantidad de = a vast amount of.
    * una verdadera lástima = a crying shame.
    * una verdadera pena = a crying shame.
    * una vez cada quincena = once a fortnight.
    * una vez cumplimentado = completed.
    * una vez + Participio = upon + Nombre.
    * una vez + Participio Pasado = having + Participio Pasado, having + just + Participio Pasado.
    * una vez + Participio Pasado + Nombre = with + Nombre + Participio Pasado.
    * una vez que + Frase = once + Frase.
    * una vez quincenalmente = once a fortnight.
    * una vez relleno = completed.
    * una vista digna de contemplar = a sight to behold.
    * una vista digna de ver = a sight to behold.
    * una yarda de largo = a yard long.
    * una zona de = a stretch of.
    * un bariburrillo de = a welter of.
    * un bebé = a babe in arms.
    * un bocadito = a little something.
    * un bombardeo de = a barrage of.
    * un buen lugar de partida = a good place to start.
    * un buen número de = a good number of.
    * un buen partido = a good catch.
    * un camino largo y difícil = a long haul.
    * un camión de = a truckload of.
    * un caso perdido = a dead dog.
    * un caudal de experiencia = a wealth of experience.
    * un centro único = one stop shop.
    * un chorreón de = a splash of, a hint of.
    * un chorretón de = a splash of, a hint of.
    * un cierto grado de = a certain amount of, a modicum of.
    * un cierto número de = a number of.
    * un conglomerado de = a conglomeration of.
    * un conjunto cada vez mayor de = a growing body of.
    * un conjunto de = a set of, a suite of, a pool of, an assembly of, a pattern of, a universe of, a harvest of, a complement of.
    * un corpus de = a body of.
    * un costal de = a sackful of.
    * un cuarto = one in four.
    * un cuarto de = a quarter of.
    * un cúmulo de = a treasure trove of.
    * un detalle = a little something.
    * un día de descanso = a day away from.
    * un día fuera = a day out.
    * un día haciendo algo diferente = a day away from.
    * un día normal = on a typical day.
    * un día sí y otro no = every other day.
    * un día sí y otro también = day in and day out.
    * un día tras otro = day after day.
    * un día y medio = one and a half days.
    * un dineral = a king's ransom, a huge amount of money.
    * un donnadie = a nobody.
    * un ejemplo claro = a case in question, a case in point.
    * un ejército de = an army of.
    * un enjambre de = a swarm of.
    * un equipo de = a team of.
    * un espectáculo digno de contemplar = a sight to behold.
    * un espectáculo digno de ver = a sight to behold.
    * un fuerte sentimiento de = a strong sense of.
    * un gran diversidad de = a broad range of.
    * un gran espectro de = a wide band of, a wide band of.
    * un gran número de = a good deal of, a great deal of, a plethora of, a wide range of, a full roster of, a fair number of, a great number of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of, a broad range of, a vast corpus of.
    * un grano de arena en el desierto = a drop in the ocean, a drop of water in a bucket.
    * un gran repertorio de = an arsenal of, an armoury of [armory].
    * un gran volumen de = a vast corpus of.
    * un grupo aferrado de = a hard core of.
    * un grupo cada vez mayor de = a growing body of.
    * un grupo de = a set of, a bunch of, a crop of, a pool of, a cadre of, a cluster of, a galaxy of, a clutch of, a company of.
    * un grupo de gente variada = a cast of people.
    * un grupo incondicional de = a hard core of.
    * un grupo variado de = a collection of.
    * un halo de bruma = a veil of mist.
    * un hombre de gentes = a man of the people.
    * un hombre de mundo = a man of the world.
    * un hombre de palabra = a man of his word.
    * un hombre de pocas palabras = a man of few words, a man of few words.
    * un intento de = an exercise in, attempted.
    * un juego de = a battery of.
    * un kaleidoscopio de = a mosaic of.
    * un lecho de rosas = a bed of roses.
    * un lujo asiático = the lap of luxury.
    * un manojo de llaves = a set of + keys.
    * un manojo de nervios = a bundle of nerves.
    * un mar de = a sea of.
    * un mar de papel = a sea of + paper.
    * un medio para alcanzar un fin = a means to an end.
    * un medio para conseguir un fin = a means to an end.
    * un medio para llegar a fin = a means to an end.
    * un mejor momento = a better time.
    * un mequetrefe = a nobody.
    * un minuto en los labios, para siempre en las caderas = a minute on the lips, forever on the hips.
    * un momento bueno de = a peak of.
    * un momento determinado = a frozen moment in time, a given moment in time.
    * un montón = like crazy, like mad.
    * un montonazo = like crazy, like mad.
    * un montonazo de = a truckload of, a whole slew of, a raft of.
    * un montonazo de dinero = a huge amount of money.
    * un montón de = a pile of, a stack of, a bundle of, a truckload of, a sackful of, a raft of.
    * un montón de dinero = a huge amount of money.
    * un mundo aparte = a world apart, a breed apart.
    * un + Nombre + a altas horas de la noche = a late night + Nombre.
    * un + Nombre + a primera hora de la mañana = an early morning + Nombre.
    * un + Nombre + a última hora de la mañana = a late morning + Nombre.
    * un + Nombre + por la mañana temprano = an early morning + Nombre.
    * un no sé qué = a je ne sais quoi.
    * un nuevo comienzo = a fresh start.
    * un nuevo impulso = a new lease of life.
    * un número cada vez mayor = growing numbers.
    * un número cada vez mayor de = a growing number of, a growing body of.
    * un número de = a series of.
    * un número reducido de = a residue of, a small number of.
    * un número variado de + Nombre = any number of + Nombre.
    * un oásis de = an oasis of.
    * uno de los + Nombre + más + Adjetivo = not the least + Adjetivo + Nombre, not the least of the + Adjetivo + Nombre.
    * uno de los + Nombre + más importante = not the least + Nombre.
    * uno de los + Nombre + más importantes = not the least of + Nombre.
    * uno de tantos = little fish in a big pond.
    * uno más = one of equals.
    * unos + Cantidad = around + Cantidad.
    * unos con otros = one another.
    * unos cuantos = a few, a smattering of + Nombre Contable, a sprinkling of.
    * unos de otros = one another.
    * unos días más tarde = a few days later.
    * unos encima de los otros = one on another.
    * unos + Fecha = about + Fecha.
    * unos + Número = some + Número.
    * unos pocos elegidos = a select few.
    * unos segundos de reflexión = a moment's thought, a moment's reflection.
    * uno u otro = one or another.
    * un paquete de = a suite of.
    * un paquete integrado de programas = a suite of + programmes.
    * un paquete ofimático integrado = a suite of office automation software.
    * un par de = a couple of.
    * un par de minutos = a couple of moments.
    * un pasado oscuro = a dark past.
    * un paso por delante de = one step ahead of.
    * un pequeño puntito = just a little dot.
    * un período de = a stretch of.
    * un período determinado = a frozen moment in time.
    * un periodo intenso de = a flurry of.
    * un pilón de = a raft of, a mass of, a stack of.
    * un poco = a bit, somewhat, slightly, something of, a little bit, kinda [kind of].
    * un poco áspero = roughish.
    * un poco como = kind of like.
    * un poco de = a measure of, a touch (of), a bit of, a piece of, a spot of, a splash of, a hint of.
    * un poco + Nombre = a shade + Nombre.
    * un poco obscuro = dusky.
    * un poco perdido = a bit at sea.
    * un poco rugoso = roughish.
    * un popurrí de = a potpourri of, a welter of.
    * un poquito = a wee bit.
    * un poquito (de) = a dash of, a tiny bit of, a splash of, a hint of, a touch (of).
    * un porrón de tiempo = donkey's years.
    * un puñado de = a bunch of, a handful of, a clutch of.
    * un querido = a little something on the side.
    * un rato = awhile.
    * un rayo de = a shimmer of.
    * un rayo de esperanza = a faint glimmer of light.
    * un rayo de luz esperanzador = a faint glimmer of light, a peep of light.
    * un regalito = a little something.
    * un revoltijo de = a jumble of, a welter of.
    * un rosario de = a rash of.
    * un saco de = a sackful of.
    * un saco lleno de = a sackful of.
    * un servicio las 24 horas = a 24-hour service.
    * un sinfín de = a myriad of, a host of, a whole host of.
    * un sinnúmero de = a myriad of, a host of, a whole host of.
    * un sueño hecho realidad = a dream come true.
    * un surtido de = an assortment of.
    * un tanto + Adjetivo = vaguely + Adjetivo.
    * un tiempo = awhile.
    * un tipo de = a kind of.
    * un toque de = a touch of, a splash of, a hint of.
    * un torrente de = a cascade of.
    * un total de = a universe of, a total of.
    * un trabajo bien hecho = a job well done.
    * un trabajo cualquiera = casual job.
    * un tramo de = a stretch of.
    * un trato justo = a square deal.
    * un trozo de = a piece of, a snatch of, a stretch of.
    * un velo de bruma = a veil of mist.
    * un viso de = a whiff of.
    * variar de una vez a otra = vary + from time to time.

    * * *
    UN
    (en Col) = Universidad Nacional
    * * *

     

    un (pl
    ◊ unos), una (pl unas) art the masculine article un is also used before feminine nouns which begin with stressed a or ha e.g. un arma poderosa, un hambre feroz

    1 ( sing) a;
    ( delante de sonido vocálico) an;
    (pl) some;

    un asunto importante an important matter;
    hay unas cartas para ti there are some letters for you;
    tiene unos ojos preciosos he has lovely eyes
    2 ( con valor ponderativo):
    ◊ tú haces unas preguntas … you do ask some questions!

    3 ( con nombres propios) a;

    4 (pl) ( expresando aproximación) about;

    un, una
    I art indet
    1 a
    una azafata, a hostess
    (antes de vocal) an
    un paraguas, an umbrella
    2 unos,-as, some: pasamos unos días en la playa, we spent some days by the sea
    II adj (cardinal) one: solo queda una, there is only one
    un kilo de azúcar, one kilo of sugar ➣ tb uno,-a
    'un' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    A
    - abajo
    - abanderar
    - abandonar
    - abandono
    - abanico
    - abatirse
    - aberración
    - abertura
    - abierta
    - abierto
    - abismo
    - ablandar
    - abogada
    - abogado
    - abordar
    - abrir
    - abrazar
    - abrazo
    - abreviar
    - abrigar
    - abrochar
    - abrupta
    - abrupto
    - absoluta
    - absoluto
    - absurda
    - absurdo
    - abusar
    - abusiva
    - abusivo
    - abusón
    - abusona
    - acá
    - acabada
    - acabado
    - acariciar
    - acaudillar
    - accidental
    - accidente
    - acelerón
    - acento
    - achatamiento
    - achicar
    - acidez
    - acierto
    - aclimatarse
    - acoger
    - acogida
    - acompañar
    English:
    A
    - abandon
    - abandoned
    - about
    - abridged
    - abroad
    - abrupt
    - absent
    - absolute
    - abuse
    - academy
    - accent
    - accept
    - acceptable
    - accepted
    - accidentally
    - accommodation
    - accomplishment
    - accuracy
    - accurate
    - accustom
    - achievement
    - acknowledgement
    - across
    - act
    - action
    - actual
    - addicted
    - adjourn
    - adjust
    - administer
    - administration
    - admission
    - admit
    - advance
    - advertise
    - advice
    - advise
    - adviser
    - afford
    - Afro
    - after
    - after-sales
    - aged
    - agent
    - aggravating
    - aggregate
    - aggressive
    - agree
    - agreement
    * * *
    un, una1 (mpl unos, fpl unas) art indeterminado Un is used instead of una before feminine nouns which begin with a stressed “a” or “ha” (e.g. un águila an eagle; un hacha an axe).
    1. [singular] a;
    [ante sonido vocálico] an;
    un hombre/tren a man/train;
    una mujer/mesa a woman/table;
    una hora an hour;
    tengo un hambre enorme I'm extremely hungry;
    un Picasso auténtico a genuine Picasso;
    un niño necesita cariño children need o a child needs affection
    2. [plural] some;
    tengo unos regalos para ti I have some presents for you;
    llegaremos en unos minutos we will arrive in a few minutes;
    había unos coches mal estacionados there were some badly parked cars;
    son unas personas muy amables they are very kind people;
    tiene unas ganas enormes de viajar he is extremely keen to travel;
    unas tijeras/gafas a pair of scissors/glasses;
    llevaba unas gafas de sol she was wearing sunglasses
    3. [ante números] [indica aproximación]
    había unos doce muchachos there were about o some twelve boys there
    4. [con valor enfático]
    ¡me dio una pena! I felt so sorry for her!;
    se te ocurren unas ideas you have some really odd ideas
    * * *
    un, una
    art indet a; antes de vocal y h muda an;
    unos coches/pájaros some cars/birds
    * * *
    un uno
    un, una art, mpl unos
    1) : a, an
    2) unos or unas pl
    : some, a few
    hace unas semanas: a few weeks ago
    3) unos or unas pl
    : about, approximately
    unos veinte años antes: about twenty years before
    * * *
    un det a / an

    Spanish-English dictionary > un

  • 10 ἐπί

    ἐπί, Thess. (before τ)
    A

    ἐτ IG9(2).517.14

     (iii B. C.), Prep. with gen., dat., and acc., to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.
    A WITH GEN.:
    I of Place,
    1 with Verbs of Rest, upon,

    καθέζετ' ἐ. θρόνου Il.1.536

    ;

    ἧστο.. ὑψοῦ ἐπ' ἀκροτάτης κορυφῆς 13.12

    ;

    ἐ. πύργου ἔστη 16.700

    ;

    κεῖται ἐ. χθονός 20.345

    : without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ' ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (sc. σταθέντα)

    ἐλήλατο 10.153

    ; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ' ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, 1.46; ἐ. γῆς, opp. ὑπὸ γῆς, Pl.Lg. 728a: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ' ἵππων on our chariot, Il.24.356;

    οὐκ ἂν ἐφ' ὑμετ έρων ὀχέων.. ἵκεσθον 8.455

    ;

    ἄγαγε.. δῶρ' ἐπ' ἀπήνης 24.447

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῆς ἁμάξης.. ὠχέετο Hdt.1.31

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῶν ἵππων ὀχεῖσθαι X.Cyr.4.5.58

    ;

    οὓς κῆρες φορέουσι.. ἐ. νηῶν Il.8.528

    ;

    πέμπειν τινὰς ἐ. τριήροιν X.HG5.4.56

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ὤμου.. φέρειν Od.10.170

    ; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ' ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, Numen. ap. Eus.PE14.7; βαδιοῦνται ἐ. δυοῖν σκελοῖν, ἐφ' ἑνὸς πορεύσονται σκέλους, Pl.Smp. 190d; ἐπ' ἄκρων ὁδοιπορεῖν walk on tiptoe, S.Aj. 1230; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support,

    νέρθε κἀπὶ γῆς ἄνω Id.OT 416

    ; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, X.An.1.8.9,3.2.36; but most freq., in, rarely in Hom., ἐπ' ἀγροῦ in the country. Od. 1.190;

    γᾶς ἐ. ξένας S.OC 1705

     (lyr.);

    νήσου τῆσδ' ἐφ' ἧς ναίει Id.Ph. 613

    ;

    ἐ. ξένας δμωῒς ἐπ' ἀλλοτρίας πόλεος E.Andr. 137

     (lyr.);

    οἱ ἐ. Θρᾴκης σύμμαχοι Th.5.35

    ;

    τοὺς ἐ. τῆς Ἀσίας κατοικοῦντας Isoc.12.103

    ; ἐπ' οἰκήματος κατίσαι, καθῆσθαι, in a brothel, Hdt.2.121.έ, Pl. Chrm. 163b;

    τοὺς ἐ. τῶν οἰκημάτων καθεζομένους Aeschin.1.74

    ;

    ἐ. τῶν ἐργαστηρίων καθίζειν Isoc.7.15

    ; μένειν ἐ. τῆς αὐτῶν (sc. χώρας ) remain in statu quo, Indut. ap. Th.4.118;

    οἱ ἐπ' ἐρημίας λῃστεύοντες Jul. Or.7.210a

    ; later of towns,

    ἐπ' Ἀλεξανδρείας BGU908.16

     (ii A.D.), etc.; sts. also, at or near, ἐπ' αὐτάων (sc. τῶν πηγῶν) Il.22.153;

    κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Ποσιδηΐου Hdt.7.115

    ; αἱ ἐ. Λήμνου ἐπικείμεναι νῆσοι off Lemnos, ib.6 codd.; τὰ ἐ. Θρᾴκης the Thrace- ward region, Th.1.59, cf. IG12.45.17, etc.; ποταμοὶ ἐφ' ὧν ἔξεστιν ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι.. on, i.e. near which.., X.An.2.5.18; ἐ. τῶν τραπεζῶν at the money-changers' tables, Pl.Ap. 17c; in Geom., αἱ ἐφ' ὧν AA BB [ γραμμαί] the lines AA BB, Arist.EN 1132b6, etc.; ἕλιξ ἐφ' ἇς τὰ ΑΒΓΔ a spiral ABCD, Archim.Spir.13 (cf. B.1.1k); also ἐ. τοῦ βάτου in the passage concerning the bush, Ev.Marc.12.26.
    2 in various relations not strictly local, μένειν ἐ. τῆς ἀρχῆς remain in the command, X.Ages.1.37; μένειν ἐ. τινος abide by it, D.4.9; ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων, ἐ. τοῦ πολεμεῖν εἶναι, to be engaged in.., Id.15.11, Prooem.1; ἐ. ὀνόματος εἶναι bear a name, Id.39.21;

    ἔχεται πόλις ἐ. νόσου S.Ant. 1141

     (lyr.).
    b of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ' ἀγκύρας ride at (i.e. in dependence upon an) anchor, Hdt.7.188; ἐ. προσπόλου μιᾶς χωρεῖν dependent upon an attendant, S.OC 746.
    c with the personal and reflexive Pron., once in Hom.,

    εὔχεσθε.. σιγῇ ἐφ' ὑμείων Il.7.195

    ; later mostly with [ per.] 3rd pers., ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν κεῖσθαι by themselves, Hdt.2.2, cf. 8.32;

    οἰκέειν κώμην Id.5.98

    ;

    ἐ. σφῶν αὐτῶν αὐτόνομοι οἰκεῖν Th.2.63

    ;

    ἵζεσθαι Hdt.9.17

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν πλεῖν Th.8.8

    ; ἐπ' ὑμέων αὐτῶν βαλέσθαι consider it by yourselves, Hdt.3.71, etc.;

    αὐτὴ ἐφ' αὑτῆς σκοποῦσα Th.6.40

    ;

    ἐφ' ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τὸν ἐξετασμὸν ποιεῖσθαι D.18.16

    ; ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν διαλέγονται speak in a dialect of their own, Hdt. 1.142; also

    αὐτοὶ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν χωρεῖν X. An.2.4.10

    ;

    πράττειν Pl.Prt. 326d

    , cf. Sph. 217c; τὸ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν μόνον προορώμενοι considering their own interest only, th.1.17.
    d with numerals, to denote the depth of a body of soldiers, ἐ. τεττάρων ταχφῆναι to be drawn up four deep, four in file, X.An.1.2.15, etc.; ἐ. πεντήκοντα ἀσπίδων συνεστραμμένοι, of the Thebansat Leuctra, Id.HG 6.4.12; ἐπ' ὀλίγων τεταγμένοι, i.e. in a long thin line, Id.An.4.8.11;

    οὐκ ἐπ' ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων στρατιὰν παρατεταγμένην Th.7.79

    ; ἐφ' ἑνὸς ἄγειν in single file, X.Cyr.2.4.2, cf. An.5.2.6; rarely of the length of the line,

    ἐ. τεσσάρων ταξάμενοι τὰς ναῦς Th.2.90

    ; in X.,

    ἐγένοντο τὸ μέτωπον ἐ. τριακοσίων.. τὸ δὲ βάθος ἐφ' ἑκατόν Cyr.2.4.2

    ; πλεῖν ἐ. κέρως, ἐ. κέρας, v. infr. c.1.3; ἐ. φάλαγγος γίγνεται τὸ στράτευμα is formed in column, An.4.6.6, etc. (but in E.Ph. 1467, ἀσπίδων ἔπι is merely in or under arms): hence, generally, ἐ. ὀκτὼ πλίνθων τὸ εὖρος eight bricks wide, X.An.7.8.14.
    e c. gen. pers., before, in presence of,

    ἐ. μαρτύρων.. πράσσεταί τι Antipho 2.3.8

    ;

    ἐξελέγχεσθαι ἐ. πάντων D.25.36

    ; so, before a magistrate or official,

    ἐ. τοῦ στρατηγοῦ POxy. 38.11

     (i A.D.), cf. UPZ71.15 (ii B.C.), Ev.Matt.28.14;

    γράψομαί σε ἐ. Ῥαδαμάνθυος Luc.Cat.18

    ;

    τινὰ εἰς δίκην καὶ κρίσιν ἐ. τῶν στρατοπέδων προκαλεῖν Jul.Or.1.30d

    ;

    πίστεις δοῦναι ἐ. θεῶν D.H.5.29

    ; but ἐπὶ δικασταῖς is f.l. in D.19.243 (leg. ἔπη).
    f with Verbs of perceiving, observing, judging, etc., in the case of,

    ἐπὶ νούσων παντοίων ἐπύθοντο Emp.112.10

    ;

    ὁρᾶν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.3.9.3

    ;

    αἰσθάνεσθαί τι ἐ. τινος Pl.R. 406c

    , etc.;

    τὴν γνώμην ἔχειν ἐ. τινος Hyp.Eux.32

    ;

    τὰ συμβόλαια ἐ. τῶν νόμων σκοπεῖν D.18.210

    ; ἐπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων ἂν ἐσκόπει ib.233, cf. 25.2 (v.l.);

    ἐφ' ἑνός τι παριδεῖν Lycurg.64

    ;

    τὰς ἐναντιώσεις ἐ. μὲν τῶν λόγων τηροῦντες, ἐ. δὲ τῶν ἔργων μὴ καθορῶντες Isoc.13.7

    ;

    οὐδεὶς ἐφ' αὑτοῦ τὰ κακὰ συνορᾷ Men.631

    ;

    ἀγνοεῖν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.2.3.2

    ; also with Verbs of speaking, on a subject,

    λέγειν ἐ. τινος Pl.Chrm. 155d

    , R. 524e, etc.;

    ἐπιδεῖξαί τι ἐ. τινος Isoc.8.109

    ;

    ἵνα τοὺς ἐπαίνους ἐπ' αὐτῶν κοινοὺς ποιήσωμαι D.60.12

    .
    3 implying Motion:
    a where the sense of motion is lost in the sense of being supported, ὀρθωθεὶς.. ἐπ' ἀγκῶνος having raised himself upon his elbow, Il.10.80;

    ἐ. μελίης.. ἐρεισθείς 22.225

    ;

    τὴν μὲν.. καθεῖσεν ἐ. θρόνου 18.389

    .
    b in a pregnant sense, denoting the goal of motion (cf.

    εἰς A.1.2

    ,

    ἐν A.1.8

    ), νῆα.. ἐπ' ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, 1.485; περάαν νήσων ἔπι carry to the islands and leave there, 21.454, cf.22.45;

    ἐ. τῆς γῆς καταπίπτειν X.Cyr.4.5.54

    ; ἀναβῆναι ἐ. τῶν πύργων ib.7.1.39;

    ἐπ' Ἀβύδου ἀφικομέναις Th.8.79

     (v.l.); freq. of motion towards or (in a military sense) upon a place,

    προτρέποντο μελαινάων ἐ. νηῶν Il.5.700

    ;

    τρέσσε.. ἐφ' ὁμίλου 11.546

     (but νήσου ἔ. Ψυρίης νέεσθαι to go near Psyria, Od.3.171); ἐπ' οἴκου ἀπελαύνειν, ἀναχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρεῖν, homewards, Hdt.2.121.δ, Th.1.30,87, etc.; also with names of places,

    ἰέναι ἐ. Κυζίκου Hdt.4.14

    ;

    πλεῖν ἐ. Χίου Id.1.164

    , cf. 168; ἀποπλεῖν ἐπ' αἰγύπτου ib. 1;

    ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἐ. Θεσσαλίης Id.5.64

    ; ὁ κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Παγασέων φέρων the bay that leads to Pagasae, Id.7.193; ἡ ἐ. βαβυλῶνος ὁδός the road leading to B., X.Cyr. 5.3.45, cf.An.6.3.24.
    c metaph., ἐ. γνώμης τινὸς γίγνεσθαι come to an opinion, D.4.7;

    ἐπ' ἐλπίδος γενέσθαι Plu.Sol.14

    ; ὡς ἐ. κινδύνου as if to meet danger, Th.6.34;

    ἐ. τοῦ ἀλύπως ζῆν

     with a view to..,

    Pl.Prt. 358b

    ; cf. infr. B. 111.2.
    II of Time, in the time of,

    ἐ. προτέρων ἀνθρώπων Il.5.637

    ,23.332;

    ἐ. Κρόνου Hes.Op. 111

    ; ἐ. Κέκροπος, ἐ. Δαρείου, etc., Hdt.8.44,6.98, etc.;

    ἐ. τῶν τριάκοντα Lys.13.2

    ;

    ὀλιγαρχία ἡ ἐ. τῶν τετρακοσίων καταστᾶσα Isoc.8.108

    ; ἐ. τούτου τυραννεύοντος, ἐ. Λέοντος βασιλεύοντος, ἐ. Μήδων ἀρχόντων, etc., Hdt.1.15,65, 134, etc.;

    ἐ. τῆς ἐμῆς βασιλείας Isoc.3.32

    ; ἐπ' ἐμεῦ in my time, Hdt.1.5, 2.46, etc.;

    ἡ εἰρήνη ἡ ἐπ' Ἀνταλκίδου D.20.54

    , cf. X.HG5.1.36;

    αἱ ἐπ' Ἀσδρούβα γενόμεναι ὁμολογίαι Plb.3.15.5

    ; ἐπ' εἰρήνης in time of peace, Il.2.797, 9.403;

    ἐπ' ἐμῆς νεότητος Ar.Ach. 211

     (lyr.);

    ἐ. Λάχητος καὶ τοῦ προτέρου πολέμου Th.6.6

    ; ἐπ' ἡμέρης ἑκάστης v.l. for -ῃ -τῃ in Hdt.5.117.
    b later ἐ. δείπνου at dinner, Luc.Asin.3; ἐ. τῆς τραπέζης, ἐφ' ἑκάστης κύλικος, Plu.Alex.23; ἐ. τῆς κύλικος, ἐ. τοῦ ποτηρίου, Luc.Pisc.34, Plu.Alex.53.
    III in various causal senses:
    1 over, of persons in authority,

    ἐπ' οὗ ἐτάχθημεν Hdt.5.109

    ; οἱ ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων the public officers, D.18.247; freq. in forged decrees, ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὅπλων στρατηγός ib.38; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, τῶν ἱππέων, ib.116; ὁ ἐ. τῆς διοικήσεως ib.38 (but cf. c. 111.3); τοῦ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν is f.l. in Lys. 32.5;

    ὁ ἐ. τῆς χώρας στρατηγός Plu.Phoc.32

    ;

    οἱ ἐ. τῶν σιτοποιῶν καὶ μαγείρων Id.Alex.23

    ;

    ὁ ἐ. τοῦ οἴνου Id.Pyrrh.5

    ; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ἐπιστολῶν τοῦ Ὄθωνος, = Lat. ab epistulis, his secretary, Id.Oth.9; cf. B. 111.6.
    2 κεκλῆσθαι ἐ. τινος to be called after him, Hdt.4.45;

    ἐ. τινος μετονομασθῆναι Id.1.94

    :

    ἐ. τινος τὰς ἐπωνυμίας ἔχειν Id.4.107

    ; ἐ. τινος ἐπώνυμος γίγνεσθαι ib. 184; also

    ἐπ' ὀνόματος καλεῖν Plb.5.35.2

    .
    3 of occasions, circumstances, and conditions, οὐκ ἐ. τούτου μόνον, ἀλλ' ἐ. πάντων, on all occasions, D.21.38, cf. 183;

    ἐφ' ἑκάστων Pl.Phlb. 25e

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑκατέρου Id.Tht. 159c

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑκάστης μαντείας D.21.54

    ; ἐπ' ἐξουσίας καὶ πλούτου πονηρὸν εἶναι in.. ib.138; ἐ. τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τοῦ πράγματος ib.72, cf. 18.17;

    τὴν ἐ. τῆς πομπῆς καὶ τοῦ μεθύειν πρόφασιν λαβών Id.21.180

    ;

    ἐ. σχολῆς Aeschin.3.191

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀδείας Plu. Sol.22

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀληθείας Ev.Marc.12.14

    , POxy.255.16 (i A.D.): hence in adverbial phrases, ἐπ' ἴσας (sc. μοίρας) equally, S.El. 1062 (lyr.);

    ἐ. καιροῦ D.20.90

    ; ἐπ' ἐσχάτων at the last, LXXDe.17.7 (v.l. ἐσχάτῳ) ; ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος for the present, SIG543.6 (Epist. Philipp.).
    4 in respect of,

    ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων Arist.Pol. 1280a17

    , cf. EN 1131b18; concerning,

    τὰ ἐπ' αὐτῶν ἐνεστηκότα PTeb.7.6

     (ii B. C.).
    B WITH DAT.:
    I of Place, upon, just like the gen. (hence Poets use whichever case suits the metre, whereas in Prose the dat. is more freq.):
    1 with Verbs of Rest,

    ἕζεο τῷδ' ἐ. δίφρῳ Il.6.354

    ;

    ἧντ' ἐ. πύργῳ 3.153

    ;

    στῆ δ' ἐ... νηΐ 8.222

    ;

    κεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι X.An.1.8.27

    ; καίειν ἐ. πᾶσι (sc. βωμοῖς) Il.8.240;

    ἔβραχε χαλκὸς ἐ. στήθεσσι 4.420

    ;

    ἐ. χθονὶ δέρκεσθαι 1.88

    , etc.: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something,

    νηυσὶν ἐπ' ὠκυπόροισιν ἔβαινον 2.351

     (v.l. for ἐν)

    ; ἐπ' ὤμοις φέρειν E.Ph. 1131

     (but ἐφ' ἵππῳ, ἐφ' ἵπποις and the like are never used for ἐφ' ἵππου, etc.); of places, mostly in,

    ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ Hdt.5.77

    ;

    τἀπὶ Τροίᾳ πέργαμα S.Ph. 353

    ;

    ἐπ' ἐσχάτοις τόποις Id.Tr. 1100

    ;

    ἐ. τῇ ψυχῇ δάκνομαι Id.Ant. 317

    ; also, at or near,

    ἐ. κρήνῃ Od.13.408

    ;

    ἐ. θύρῃσι Il.2.788

    , etc.; of rivers, etc., by, beside,

    ἐ. ὠκυρόῳ Κελάδοντι.. 7.133

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ἐσχάρῃ Od.7.160

    ;

    ἐ. νηυσί Il.1.559

    , etc.; of persons, οὐ τἀπὶ Λυδοῖς οὐδ' ἐπ' Ὀμφάλῃ λατρεύματα in Lydia, in the power of O., S.Tr. 356.
    b on or over, ἐπ' Ἰφιδάμαντι over the body of Iphidamas, Il.11.261, cf. 4.470;

    τοιόνδ' ἐπ' ἀνδρὶ κομπάζεις λόγον A.Ag. 1400

    ; also, over or in honour of,

    ἐ. σοὶ κατέθηκε.. ἄεθλα Od.24.91

    ; [

    βοῦς] ἐ. Πατρόκλῳ πέφνεν Il. 23.776

    ;

    κειράμενοι χαίτας ἐπ' Ἀδώνιδι Bion 1.81

    , cf. Lys.2.80; in [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol.sepulchral Inscrr., Schwyzer 348,al.
    c in hostile sense, against, Hdt.1.61,6.74, 88, S.Ph. 1139 (lyr.), etc.; as a check upon,

    οἱ πρόβουλοι καθεστᾶσιν ἐ. τοῖς βουλευταῖς Arist.Pol. 1299b37

    , cf. 1271a39; also, towards, in reference to,

    ἐ. πᾶσι χόλον τελέσαι Il.4.178

    ;

    ἐπ' ἔργοις πᾶσι S.OC 1268

    ;

    δικαιότερος καὶ ἐπ' ἄλλῳ ἔσσεαι Il.19.181

    , cf. S.Tr. 994 (anap.), etc.;

    ἐ. τοῖς δυνατοῖς ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην Democr. 191

    ; τὸ ἐ. πᾶσιν τοῖς σώμασι κάλλος extending over all bodies, Pl. Smp. 210b; ἡ [παιδεία] ἡ ἐ. σώμασι, ἐ. ψυχῇ, Id.R. 376e; τἀπὶ σοὶ κακά the ills which lie upon thee, S.Ph. 806: in [dialect] Att. also, νόμον τίθεσθαι, θεῖναι ἐ. τινι, make a law for his case, whether for or against, Pl.Grg. 488d, Lexap.And.1.87;

    νόμους ἀναγράψαι ἐ. τοῖς ἀδικοῦσι D.24.5

    ; νόμος κεῖται ἐ. τινι ib.70; τἀπὶ τῷ πλήθει νενομοθετημένα ib.123, cf. 142; τί θεσμοποιεῖς ἐ. ταλαιπώρῳ νεκρῷ; E.Ph. 1645.
    d. of accumulation, upon, after, ὄγχνη ἐπ' ὄγχνῃ one pear after another, pear on pear, Od.7.120;

    ἐ. κέρδεϊ κέρδος Hes.Op. 644

    ;

    ἄτη ἑτέρα ἐπ' ἄτῃ A. Ch. 404

     (lyr.); πήματα ἐ. πήμασι, ἐ. νόσῳ νόσος, S.Ant. 595, OC 544 (both lyr.).
    e. in addition to, over and above, besides, οὐκ ἄρα σοί γ'

    ἐ. εἴδεϊ καὶ φρένες ἦσαν Od.17.454

    , cf. 308;

    ἄλλα τε πόλλ' ἐ. τῇσι παρίσχομεν Il.9.639

    , cf. Od.22.264; ἐ. τοῖσι besides, 24.277;

    ἐ. τούτοις Him.Or.14.10

    ; so of Numerals,

    τρισχιλίους ἐ. μυρίοις Plu.Publ.20

    , cf. Jul.Or.4.148c, etc.;

    γυναῖκ' ἐφ' ἡμῖν.. ἔχει E.Med. 694

    : with Verbs of eating and drinking, with,

    ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ πίνειν ὕδωρ X.Cyr.6.2.27

    ; νέκταρ

    ποτίσαι ἐπ' ἀμβροσίᾳ Pl.Phdr. 247e

    ; esp. of a relish, κάρδαμον μόνον

    ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.2.11

    ;

    παίειν ἐφ' ἁλὶ τὰν μᾶδδαν Ar.Ach. 835

    : metaph., ἐ. τῷ φάγοις ἥδιστ' ἄν; ἐ. βαλλαντίῳ; Id.Eq. 707; later ἐ. γογγυλίσι διαβιῶναι live on turnips, Ath.10.419a.
    f. of position, after, behind, of soldiers, X.Cyr.8.3.16-18.
    g. in dependence upon, in the power of,

    τὰ δ' οὐκ ἐπ' ἀνδράσι κεῖται Pi.P.8.76

    ; ἐ. τινί ἐστι it is in his power to do, c.inf., Hdt.8.29, etc.;

    ἐ. σοί ἐστιν ἀναζωπυρεῖν M.Ant.7.2

    ;

    ἐ. ἑτέροις γίγνεσθαι Th.6.22

    ; ἐ. τῷ πλήθει in their hands, S.OC66, cf. Th.2.84; τὸ ἐπ' ἐμοί, τὸ ἐ. ἐκείνῳ, etc., as far as is in my power, etc., X. Cyr.5.4.11, Isoc.4.142, etc.;

    τὸ ἐ. τούτοις εἶναι Lys.28.14

    ; ἐ. τοῖς υἱάσι their property, Leg.Gort.4.37.
    h. according to, ἐ. τοῖς νόμοις Lexap.D. 24.56;

    ἐ. πᾶσι δικαίοις ποιούμεθα τοὺς λόγους Id.20.88

    ;

    ἐ. προφάσει θηρός S.Tr. 662

     codd.(lyr.).
    i. of condition or circumstances in which one is,

    ἀτελευτήτῳ ἐ. ἔργῳ Il.4.175

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ἀρρήτοις λόγοις S.Ant. 556

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀσφάκτοις μήλοισι E. Ion 228

     (lyr.);

    ταύταις ἐ. συντυχίαις Pi.P.1.36

    ;

    ἐπ' εὐπραξίᾳ S.OC 1554

    ;

    ἐ. τῷ παρόντι Th.2.36

    ; ἐπ' αὐτοφώρῳ λαβεῖν, v. αὐτόφωρος; also ἐ. τῷ δείπνῳ at dinner, X.Cyr.1.3.12, Thphr.Char. 3.2;

    ἐ. τῇ κύλικι Pl.Smp. 214b

    ;

    ἐ. θαλίαις E.Med. 192

     (anap.).
    k. Geom., of the point, etc., at which letters are written, κέντρον ἐφ' ᾧ K Hippocr. ap. Simp.in Ph.64.14; ἡ [γραμμὴ] ἐφ' ᾗ HK the line HK, Arist.Mete. 375b22.
    2. with Verbs of Motion:
    a. where the sense of motion merges in that of support,

    ἐ. χθονὶ βαίνει Il.4.443

    ;

    θεῖναι ἐ. γούνασιν 6.92

    ;

    καταθέσθαι ἐ. γαίῃ 3.114

    ; ἱστὸν ἔστησεν ἐ.

    ψαμάθοις 23.853

    ;

    ἐ. φρεσὶ θῆκε 1.55

    ; δυσφόρους ἐπ' ὄμμασι γνώμας

    βαλεῖν S.Aj.51

    , etc.
    b. in pregnant construction, πέτονται ἐπ' ἄνθεσιν fly on to the flowers and settle there, Il.2.89; ἐκ.. βαῖνον ἐ.

    ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης Od.15.499

    ;

    καθεῖσεν ἐ. Σκαμάνδρῳ Il.5.36

    ; ἦλθε δ'

    ἐ. Κρήτεσσι 4.251

    , cf. 273;

    νῆες εἰρύατ'.. ἐ. θινὶ θαλάσσης 4.248

    .
    c. rarely for εἰς c.acc.,

    νηυσὶν ἔ. γλαφυρῇσιν ἐλαυνέμεν 5.327

    , 11.274.
    d. in hostile sense, upon or against, ἐ. τινι ἔχειν, ἰθύνειν ἵππους, 5.240, 8.110; ἐ. τινι ἱέναι βέλος, ἰθύνεσθαι ὀϊστόν, 1.382, Od.22.8; ἐ. τοι

    Ἀκράγαντι τανύσαις Pi.O.2.91

    ;

    ἐ. Τυδεΐδῃ ἐτιταίνετο.. τόξα Il.5.97

    ;

    ἐφ' Ἕκτορι.. ἀκοντίσσαι 16.358

    ;

    κύνας.. σεύῃ ἐπ' ἀγροτέρῳ συΐ 11.293

    ;

    ὡρμήθησαν ἐπ' ἀνδράσιν Od.10.214

    , cf. E.Ph. 1379, etc.: also ἐ. τινι

    τετάχθαι Th.2.70

    , 3.13;

    ὅστις φάρμακα δηλητήρια ποιοῖ ἐ. Τηΐοισιν SIG37.2

     (Teos, v B.C.).
    II. of Time, rarely, and never in good [dialect] Att., exc. in sense of succession (infr. 2), ἐ. νυκτί by night, Il.8.529;

    ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ, αἱ δ' ἐ. νυκτί Hes.Op. 102

    ; ἐπ' ἤματι τῷδε on this very day, Il.13.234; ἐπ' ἤματι for to-day, 19.229, 10.48, Od.2.284; αἰεὶ ἐπ' ἤματι every day, 14.105;

    ἐπ' ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ Hdt.4.112

    , 5.53, cf. D.S. 34/5.2.1;

    ὁ ἥλιος νέος ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ ἐστίν Heraclit.6

    ;

    ἐ. τρίς Act.Ap.10.16

    , PHolm.1.18.
    2. of succession, after, ἕκτῃ ἐ. δέκα on the 16th of the month, Chron. ap. D.18.155, Decr.ib.181 ( δεκάτῃ codd.); τετράδι

    ἐ. δέκα IG12.304.62

    ; πρὸ τῆς ἕκτης ἐ. δέκα ib.22.1361.19; ἐπ' ἐξεργασμένοισι, = Lat. re peracta, Hdt.4.164, etc.; ἐ. τινι ἀγορεύειν, ἀνίστασθαι, E.Or. 898, 902, X.Cyr.2.3.7, etc.;

    ἐ. διεφθαρμένοισι Ἴωσι Hdt.1.170

    , τὰ ἐ. τούτοισι, = Lat. quod superest, Id.9.78, cf. Th.1.65, A.Ag. 255, etc.;

    τοὐπὶ τῷδε πῆμα E.Hipp. 855

     (lyr.), etc.
    3. in the time of (cf. A. 11) only in Arc.,

    ἐπὶ Χαιριάδαι Schwyzer665

     A 21, cf. 666 (Orchom.).
    III. in various causal senses:
    1. of the occasion or cause, τετεύξεται ἄλγε' ἐπ' αὐτῇ for her, Il.21.585; ἐ. σοὶ μάλα πόλλ' ἔπαθον for thee, 9.492: freq. with Verbs expressing some mental affection,

    ἐπὶ παντὶ λόγῳ ἐπτοῆσθαι Heraclit.87

    ; μέγα φρονεῖν ἐ. τινι to be proud at or of a thing, Pl.Prt. 342d, X.HG3.4.11, etc.; χλιδᾶν ἐ . τινι S.El. 360; ἀγάλλεσθαι, ἀγανακτεῖν ἐ. τοῖς παροῦσι, X.An.2.6.26, Isoc.4.122;

    ὀνομαστὸς ἐ. τινι γεγονέναι X.Mem.1.2.61

    ; also ἐφ' αἵματι φεύγειν to be tried on a capital charge, D.21.105; πληγὰς λαμβάνειν

    ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.1.3.16

    ;

    ζημιοῦσθαι ἐ. τινι D.24.122

    , etc.: in adverbial phrases [δικάσσαι] ἐπ' ἀρωγῇ with favour, Il.23.574;

    δολίῃ ἐ. τέχνῃ Hes. Th. 540

    ;

    ἐ. μιῇ αἰτίῃ ἀνήκεστον πάθος ἔρδειν Hdt.1.137

    , etc.; ἐ . κακουργίᾳ καὶ οὐκ ἀρετῇ for malice, Th.1.37; ἐπ' εὐνοία, ἐπ' ἔχθρα, D. 18.273, 21.55; ἐπ' ἀγαθῇ ἐλπίδι with.., X.Mem.2.1.18, cf. Ep.Rom. 4.18; ἐφ' ἑκατέροις in both cases, Pl.Tht. 158d, cf. Xenoph.34.4; ἐ.

    δάκρυσί τινα καταστένειν E. Tr. 315

     (lyr.); ἐ. τῇ πάσῃ συκοφαντίᾳ καὶ διασεισμῷ Mitteis Chr. 31 vI (ii B.C.), etc.
    2. of an end or purpose,

    υἱὸν ἐ. κτεάτεσσι λιπέσθαι Il.5.154

    , cf. 9.482; ἐ. δόρπῳ for supper, Od.18.44;

    ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου σίδηρος ἀνεύρηται Hdt.1.68

    ;

    ἐ. διαφθορῇ Id.4.164

    ;

    ἐ. σῷ καιρῷ S.Ph. 151

     (lyr.);

    ἐ. τῷ κέρδει X.Mem.1.2.56

    ; δῆσαι ἐ. θανάτῳ or τὴν ἐ. θανάτῳ, Hdt.9.37, 3.119, cf.1.109, X.An.1.6.10;

    ἐ. θανάτῳ συλλαβεῖν Isoc.4.154

    ; ἐπ' ἐξαγωγῇ for exportation, Hdt.5.6; χρηστηριάζεσθαι ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ with a view to gaining.., Id.1.66;

    ἐ. τούτοις ἐθύσαντο X.An.3.5.18

    ;

    ἐ. τῷ ὑβρίζεσθαι Th.1.38

    , cf.34, etc.;

    τι κακοτεχνεῖν ἐ. αἰσχύνῃ τοῦ ἀνδρός PEleph.1.6

     (iv B.C.).
    3. of the condition upon which a thing is done, ἐ. τούτοισι on these terms, Hdt.1.60, etc.;

    ἐ. τοῖσδε, ὥστε.. Th.3.114

    ; ἐ. τούτῳ, ἐπ' ᾧτε on condition that.., Hdt.3.83, cf. 7.158: in orat. obliq., ἐπ' or ἐφ' ᾧτε folld. by inf., Id.1.22, 7.154, X.HG2.2.20;

    ἐφ' ᾧ μηδὲν κακὸν ποιήσουσιν Th.1.126

     (but ἐφ' ᾧ = wherefore, Ep.Rom.5.12); ἐπ' οὐδενί on no condition, on no account, Hdt.3.38; but, for no adequate reason, D. 21.132; ἐπ' ἴσῃ τε καὶ ὁμοίῃ, ἐπὶ τῇ ἴσῃ καὶ ὁμοίᾳ, on fair and equal terms, Hdt.9.7, Th.1.27; ἐ. ῥητοῖς, v. ῥητός; also of a woman's dowry,

    τὴν μητέρα ἐγγυᾶν ἐ. ταῖς ὀγδοήκοντα μναῖς D.28.16

    ; γῆμαί

    τινα ἐ. δέκα ταλάντοις And.4.13

    ;

    τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα ἐ. τῇ τυραννίδι Hdt.1.60

    ; on the principle of..,

    ἐ. τῷ μὴ λυπεῖν ἀλλήλους Th.1.71

    .
    4. of the price for which..,

    ἔργον τελέσαι δώρῳ ἔ. μεγάλῳ Il.10.304

    , cf. 21.445; ἐ. τίνι χρήματι; Hdt.3.38; ἐ. πόσῳ; Pl.Ap. 41a; ἐ .

    ταλάντῳ χρυσίου Ar.Av. 154

    ; ἐπ' ἀργυρίῳ λέγειν, πράττειν, D.19.182, 24.200;

    ἐ. χρήμασι λυμαίνεσθαι Id.19.332

    ;

    ἐ. πολλῷ ἐρρᾳθυμηκότες Id.1.15

    ; also of money lent at interest, δανείζεσθαι ἐ. τοῖς μεγάλοις τόκοις ibid.; ἐ. δραχμῇ δανείζειν lend at 12 per cent., Id.27.9; ἐπ' ὀκτὼ ὀβολοῖς τὴν μνᾶν τοῦ μηνὸς ἑκάστου δανείζειν, i.e. at 16 per cent., Id.53.13;

    ἐ. διακοσίαις εἴκοσι πέντε τὰς χιλίας

     for

    225

    per mille, i.e. 22.5 per cent., Syngr. ap. eund.35.10; also of the security on which money is borrowed,

    δανείζειν ἐ. ἀνδραπόδοις Id.27.27

    ; ἐπ' οἴνου

    κεραμίοις τρισχιλίοις Id.35.18

    ;

    ἐ. νηΐ Id.56.3

    ;

    δανείζειν ἐ. τοῖς σώμασιν Arist.Ath.9.1

    , cf. 2.2, D.H.4.9.
    5. of names, φάος καὶ νὺξ ὀνόμασται..

    ἐ. τοῖσί τε καὶ τοῖς Parm.9.2

    ;

    ἐ. τῇ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔχθρᾳ στάσις κέκληται Pl.R. 470b

    ; so

    ὄνομα κεῖται ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.2.2.12

    ; ὄνομα καλεῖν

    ἐ. τινι Pl.Sph. 218c

    , cf. 244b; πότερον ταῦτα, πέντε ὀνόματα ὄντα, ἐ.

    ἑνὶ πράγματί ἐστι Id.Prt. 349b

     (v. supr. A. 111.2).
    6. of persons in authority, ὅς μ' ἐ. βουσὶν εἷσεν who set me over the kine, Od.20.209, cf. 221;

    ποιμαίνειν ἐπ' ὄεσσι Il.6.25

    ;

    οὖρον κατέλειπον ἐ. κτεάτεσσιν Od.15.89

    ;

    σημαίνειν ἐ. δμῳῇσι 22.427

    ; πέμπειν ἐ. τοσούτῳ

    στρατεύματι Th.6.29

    ;

    ἐ. ταῖς ναυσίν X.HG1.5.11

    ;

    οἱ ἐ. ταῖς μηχαναῖς Id.Cyr.6.3.28

    ; οἱ ἐ. ταῖς καμήλοις ib.33;

    οἱ ἐ. τοῖς πράγμασιν ὄντες D. 9.2

    ;

    ἐ. θυγατρὶ.. γαμεῖν ἄλλην γυναῖκα Hdt.4.154

    .
    7. in possession of, possessing,

    ἐ. τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ μένειν Th.4.105

    , cf. 8.86; ζῆν ἐ. παιδίοις, τελευτᾶν ἐ. παιδὶ γνησίῳ, Alciphr.1.3, Philostr.VS2.12.2;

    ἐ. παισὶ διαδόχοις Hdn.4.2.1

    ;

    ἀποθανεῖν ἐ. κληρονόμοις ταῖς θυγατράσι Artem.1.78

    , cf. PMeyer6.22 (ii A.D.);

    ἐ. μόνῳ παιδὶ σαλεύειν Hld. 1.9

    .
    C. WITH Acc.:
    I. of Place, upon or on to a height, with Verbs of Motion,

    ἐ. πύργον ἔβη Il.6.386

    , cf. 12.375; ἐ. τὰ ὑψηλότατα τῶν

    ὀρέων ἀναβαίνειν Hdt.1.131

    ;

    προελθεῖν ἐ. βῆμα Th.2.34

    ; ἀναβιβαστέον τινά, ἀναβαίνειν ἐ. τὸν ἵππον, Pl.R. 467e, X.An.3.4.35; also ἐξ ἵππων

    ἀποβάντες ἐ. χθόνα Il.3.265

    ; ἐξεκυλίσθη πρηνὴς ἐ. στόμα upon his face, 6.43;

    ἐ. θρόνον.. ἕζετο 8.442

    ; ὤμω.. ἐ. στῆθος συνοχωκότε drawn together upon his breast, 2.218;

    Ὀδυσσῆ' εἷσαν ἐ. σκέπας Od.6.212

    ;

    θέσθαι ἐ. τὰ γόνατα X.An.7.3.23

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα καθεύδειν Aeschin.Socr.54

    ; ἐ. κεφαλήν head- foremost, Pl.R. 553b, Luc.Pisc.48 (v. κεφαλή): less freq. than ἐπί with gen. or dat.
    b. Geom., αἱ ἐ. τὰς ἁφὰς ἐπιζευγνύμεναι εὐθεῖαι joining the points of contact, Archim. Sph.Cyl.1.8; κάθετος ἐ. perpendicular to (v. κάθετος).
    2. to,

    ἦλθε θοὰς ἐ. νῆας Il.1.12

    , etc.; ἐ. βωμὸν ἄγων ib. 440; ἴθυσαν δ' ἐ.

    τεῖχος 12.443

    ;

    ἐ. τέρμ' ἀφίκετο S.Aj.48

    ;

    ἡ [ὁδὸς] ἐ. Σοῦσα φέρει X. An.3.5.15

    ;

    ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπὸ τῶν Πυλῶν ἐ. τὸ Ποσειδώνιον Th.4.118

    ; ἐ.

    τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Id.1.79

    : c.acc. pers.,

    βῆ δ' ἄρ' ἐπ' Ἀτρεΐδην Il.2.18

    , cf. 10.18,85, 150, etc.: sts. in pregn. constr. with Verbs of Rest,

    ἐπιστῆναι ἐ. τὰς θύρας Pl.Smp. 212d

    ;

    παρεῖναι ἐ. τὸν τάφον Th.2.34

    , cf. X.Cyr.3.3.12.
    b. metaph., ἐ. ἔργα τρέπεσθαι, ἰέναι, Il.3.422, Od.2.127;

    ἰέναι ἐ. τὸν ἔπαινον Th.2.36

    ;

    ἐ. συμφορὴν ἐμπεσεῖν Hdt.7.88

     codd.; also ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν ἀποδιδόναι, ὀφείλειν, pay, owe to the bank, D.33.12, Docum. ap. eund.45.31; ἡ ἐγγύη ἡ ἐ. τὴν

    τράπεζαν D.33.10

    ; τὸ ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν χρέως ib.24; also εἰσποιηθῆναι ἐ. τὸ ὄνομά τινος to be entered under his name, Id.44.36.
    c. up to, as far as ( μέχρι ἐ. X.An.5.1.[1]),

    παρατείνειν ἐπ' Ἡρακλέας στήλας Hdt.4.181

    ;

    ἐ. θάλασσαν καθήκειν Th.2.27

    ,97: metaph., ἐ. πείρατ' ἀέθλων

    ἤλθομεν Od.23.248

    ; ἐ. διηκόσια ἀποδιδόναι yield 200- fold, Hdt. 1.193; in measurements,

    πλέον ἢ ἐ. δύο στάδια X.Cyr.7.5.8

    , An.6.2.2; ὅσον ἐ. εἴκοσι σταδίους ib.6.4.5, cf. 1.7.15: freq. with a neut. Adj. or Pron.,

    τόσσον τίς τ' ἐπιλεύσσει ὅσον τ' ἐ. λᾶαν ἵησιν Il.3.12

    ; ὅσσον

    ἔφ' 2.616

    , cf. 15.358; ἐ. τοσοῦτό γε φρονέω,.. ταύτην μηδὲν σίνεσθαι I am prudent enough, not to.., Hdt.6.97;

    ἐ. ὅσον δεῖ Th.7.66

    ; ἐ.

    πάντ' ἀφίξομαι S.OT 265

    ;

    ἐ. πᾶν ἐλθεῖν X.An.3.1.18

    ; ἐ. τὸ ἔσχατον

    ἀγῶνος ἐλθεῖν Th.4.92

    ; ἐ. μεῖζον χωρεῖν, ἔρχεσθαι, ib. 117, S.Ph. 259;

    ἐ. μέγα χωρεῖν δυνάμεως Th.1.118

    ; ἐ. μακρότερον, ἐ. μακρότατον, Id.4.41, 1.1, Hdt.4.16, 192; ἐ. σμικρόν, ἐ. βραχύ, a little way, a little, S. El. 414, Th.1.118; ἐπ' ἔλαττον, ἐπ' ἐλάχιστον, Pl.Phd. 93b, Th.1.70; ἐπ' ὀλίγον, ἐ. πολλά, Pl.Sph. 254b; ἐ. πλέον still more, Hdt.2.171, 5.51, Th.2.51; rarely with Advs.,

    ἐ. μᾶλλον Hdt.1.94

    , 4.181.
    d. before, into the presence of (cf. A. 1.2e),

    ἦγον δή μιν ἐ. τὰ κοινά Id.3.156

     (but στὰς ἐ. τὸ συνέδριον standing at the door of the council, Id.8.79);

    ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχθήσεσθε Ev.Matt.10.18

    .
    e. in Military phrases (cf. A. 1.2d), ἐπ' ἀσπίδας πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν ἐτάξαντο, i.e. twenty-five in file, Th.4.93; dub. in X., as ἐ. πολλοὺς τεταγμένοι many in file, An.4.8.11 codd.;

    ἐπ' ὀλίγον τὸ βάθος γίγνεσθαι Cyr.7.5.2

     codd.; for ἐ. κέρας v. infr.3.
    3. of the quarter or direction towards or in which a thing takes place, ἐ. δεξιά, ἐπ' ἀριστερά, to the right or left, Il.7.238, 12.240, Od.3.171, Hdt.6.33, etc.; ἐ. τὰ ἕτερα or ἐ. θάτερα, Id.5.74, Th.1.87, etc.; ἐ. τὰ μακρότερα , βραχύτερα, on the longer, shorter side, Hdt.1.50; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα νοέων both ways, Id.8.22;

    ἐπ' ἀμφότερα μαχᾶν τάμνειν τέλος Pi.O.13.57

    , etc.; ἐ. τάδε Φασήλιδος on this side, Isoc.7.80; ἐ. ἐκεῖνα, v. ἐπέκεινα; ἐφ' ἕν, ἐ. δύο, ἐ. τρία, of space, in one, two, three dimensions, Arist.de An. 404b23, Plot.6.3.13; in Military phrases, ἐ. δόρυ ἀναστρέψαι ,ἐ. ἀσπίδα μεταβαλέσθαι, to the spear or shield side, i.e. to right or left, X.An.4.3.29, Cyr.7.5.6; ἐ. πόδα ἀναχωρεῖν, etc., retire on the foot, i.e. facing the enemy, Id.An.5.2.32; so ἐ. κέρας or ἐ. κέρως πλεῖν, etc., sail towards or on the wing, i.e. in column (v.

    κέρας v11

    ): metaph., ἐ. τὸ μεῖζον κοσμῆσαι, δεινῶσαι, etc., with exaggeration, Th.1.10, 8.74, etc.;

    ἐ. τὸ πλέον ἀγγέλλεσθαι Id.6.34

    ; ἐ. τὸ φοβερώτερον ib.83; ἐ. τὰ γελοιότερα ἐπαινέσαι so as to provoke laughter, Pl. Smp. 214e; ἐ. τὰ καλλίω, ἐ. τὰ αἰσχίονα, Id.Plt. 293e; ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον καὶ κάλλιον, ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον καὶ τὸ αἴσχιον, Id.R. 381b; ἐ. τὸ ἄμεινον Orac. ap. D.43.66.
    4. in hostile sense, against,

    ἰέναι ἐ. νέας Il. 13.101

    ;

    ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτούς 5.590

    ; στρατεύεσθαι or -εύειν ἐ. τινα, Hdt. 1.71,77, Th.1.26, etc.;

    ἰέναι ἐ. φάτιν S.OT 495

     (lyr.); πλεῖν ἐ. τοὺσ

    Ἀθηναίους Th.2.90

    ;

    πέμπειν στρατηγὸν ἐ. τινας Hdt.1.153

    ; θύεσθαι ἐ. τινα offer sacrifice on going against.., X.An.7.8.21; ἐφ' ὑμᾶς to your prejudice, D.6.33, 10.57.
    5. of extension over a space, πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρὴν ἤλυθον over much water, Il.10.27: ἐπ' εὐρέα νῶτα

    θαλάσσης 2.159

    ;

    ἐ. κύματα 13.27

    ;

    ὁρόων ἐπ' ἀπείρονα πόντον 1.350

    ; πλέων, λεύσσων ἐ. οἴνοπα πόντον, 7.88, 5.771;

    ἐ. πολλὰ δ' ἀλήθην Od. 14.120

    ;

    ἄγοισι.. Ἀνδρομάχαν.. ἐπ' ἄλμυρον πόντον Sapph.Supp. 20a

    . 7: also with Verbs of Rest, ἐπ' ἐννέα κεῖτο πέλεθρα over nine acres he lay stretched, Od.11.577; τόσσον ἔπ' over so much, 5.251, cf. 13.114; διώκοντες ἐ. πολύ over a large space, Th.1.50, cf. 62, etc.; ἐ. πλεῖστον ib.4;

    ὡς ἐ. πλεῖστον 2.34

    , etc.; freq. to be rendered on,

    δράκων ἐ. νῶτα δαφοινός Il.2.308

    ; ἵππους.. ἐ. νῶτον ἐΐσας ib. 765;

    ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει 17.447

    ; ἐ. γαῖαν εἰσὶ δύω [γένη] Hes.Op.11;

    ἀοιδοὶ ἔασιν ἐ. χθόνα Th.95

    ;

    ἐ. γᾶν μέλαιναν ἔμμεναι κάλλιστον Sapph. Supp.5.2

    ; also, among,

    κλέος πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους Il.10.213

    , cf. 24.202, 535;

    δασσάμενοι [κτήματ'] ἐφ' ἡμέας Od.16.385

    , cf. Pl.Prt. 322d.
    II. of Time, for or during a certain time,

    ἐ. χρόνον Il.2.299

    , Od.14.193:

    πολλὸν ἐ. χρόνον 12.407

    ;

    παυρίδιον.. ἐ. χρόνον Hes. Op. 133

    ;

    ἐ. δηρόν Il.9.415

    ;

    ἐ. πολὺν χρόνον Pl.Phd. 84c

    , etc.; ἐπ'

    ὀλίγον χρόνον Lycurg.7

    ; ἐ. χρόνον τινά, ἐ. τινα χρόνον, Pl.Prt. 344b, Grg. 524d;

    γῆν ἀπεμίσθωσαν ἐ. δέκα ἔτη Th.3.68

    ; ἐ. διετές Lexap.D. 46.20;

    ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας X.An.6.6.36

    ; τὸ ἐφ' ἡμέραν ἀρκέσον enough for the day, Id.Cyr.6.2.34, cf. D.50.23, Hdt.1.32; ἐ. πολύ for a long time, Th.1.6, etc.
    2. up to, until a certain time, εὗδον παννύχιος

    καὶ ἐπ' ἠῶ καὶ μέσον ἦμαρ Od.7.288

    ;

    οὐδ' ἐ. γῆρας ἵκετ' 8.226

    .
    III. in various causal senses:
    1. of the object or purpose for which one goes, ἀγγελίην ἔπι Τυδῆ στεῖλαν sent him for (i.e. to bring) tidings of.., Il.4.384 (dub.); ἐ. βοῦν ἴτω let him go for an ox, Od.3.421;

    ἐ. τεύχεα δ' ἐσσεύοντο Il.2.808

    ;

    ἐλθεῖν πρός τινα ἐπ' ἀργύριον X.Cyr.1.6.12

    ; πέμπειν εἴς τινα ἐ. στράτευμα ib.4.5.31; ἴτω τις ἐφ' ὕδωρ ib.5.3.49; ἥκειν ἐ. τοὺς τόκους for (i.e. to demand) the interest, D.50.61: less freq. c. acc. pers.,

    ἐπ' Ὀδυσσῆα ἤϊε Od.5.149

    , cf. S.OT 555;

    κατῆλθον ἐ. ποιητήν Ar.Ra. 1418

    ;

    κατέρχονται ἐ. τὸν Ἀγόρατον Lys. 13.23

    : with acc. of a Noun of Action, ἐξιέναι ἐ. θήραν go out hunting, X.Cyr.1.2.9; ἔπλεον οὐχ ὡς ἐ. ναυμαχίαν (v.l. for -μαχίᾳ) Th.2.83;

    ἐ. μάχην ἰέναι X.An.1.4.12

    ; ἔρχεσθαι, ἵζειν ἐ. δεῖπνον, Il.2.381, Od.24.394;

    ἐ. δόρπον ἀνέστη 12.439

    ;

    κληθεὶς ἐ. δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174e

    , etc.;

    καλεῖν ἐ. ξείνια Hdt.2.107

    ,5.18; ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν to see the sight, Ev.Luc.23.48, cf. PTeb.33.6 (ii B.C.): freq. with neut. Pron. or Adj., ἐ. τοῦτο ἐλθεῖν for this purpose, X.An.2.5.22, cf. Th.5.87; ἐπ' αὐτὸ

    τοῦτο Pl.Grg. 447b

    , etc.; ἐ. τί; to what end? Ar.Nu. 256;

    ἐφ' ὅ τι Id.Lys.22

    , 481; ἐφ' ἃ ἤλθομεν for which purpose, Th.7.15, etc.; ἐπὶ ἴσα for like ends, Pi.N.7.5 (but ἐ. ἶσα μάχη τέτατο, = ἴσως, Il.12.436); ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον to a better result, X.An.7.8.4; ἀναστῆσαί τινα ἐ. χριστὸν Θεοῦ set up as God's anointed, LXX 2 Ki.23.1: after an Adj., ἄριστοι πᾶσαν

    ἐπ' ἰθύν Il.6.79

    , cf. Od.4.434;

    ἄπορος ἐ. φρόνιμα S.OT 691

     (lyr.); χρήσιμος

    ἐ... οὐδέν D.25.31

    : after a Noun,

    ὁδὸς ἐ. τι X.Cyr.1.6.21

    ; ὄργανα ἐ. τι ib.6.2.34.
    2. so far as regards,

    τοὐπὶ τήνδε τὴν κόρην S.Ant. 889

    ;

    ὅσον γε τοὐπ' ἐμέ E.Or. 1345

    ; τοὐπί σε, τὸ ἐ. σέ, Id.Hec. 514, X.Cyr.1.4.12;

    τὸ ἐ. σφᾶς εἶναι Th.4.28

    ; ὡς ἐ. τὸ πολύ for the most part, Arist.Top. 100b29, etc.;

    ἐ. πᾶν Th.2.51

    ; τὸ πρὸς ἅπαν

    ξυνετὸν ἐ. πᾶν ἀργόν Id.3.82

    ;

    κρείσσων ἐπ' ἀρετήν Democr.181

    ; ἐ.

    μέγα Call.Dian.55

    .
    3. of persons set over others, ἐ. τοὺς πεζοὺς

    καθιστάναι ἄρχοντα X.Cyr.4.5.58

    , cf. HG3.4.20; στρατηγὸς ἐ. τοὺς ὁπλίτας, ἐ. τὴν χώραν, Arist.Ath.61.1, IG22.682.24;

    ἐ. τὸν Πειραιέα Arist.Ath.

    l.c.;

    ἐ. Ῥαμνοῦντα IG2.1206b

     (cf. A. 111.1); οἱ θεσμοθέται

    οἱ ἐ. τοὺς νόμους κληρούμενοι D.20.90

    .
    4. according to, by, ἐ. στάθμην by the rule, Od.5.245, 21.44, etc.
    D. POSITION:— ἐπί may suffer anastrophe ([etym.] ἔπι) and follow its case, as in Il.1.162; it may like wise follow its Verb,

    ἤλυθ' ἔπι ψυχή Od.24.20

    , cf. Il.9.539.
    II. in Poets it is sts. put with the second of two Nouns, though in sense it also governs the first, ἢ ἁλὸς ἢ ἐ.

    γῆς Od.12.27

    , cf. S.OT 761, Ant. 367 (lyr.).
    E. ABS., used adverbially, without anastrophe, καὶ ἐ. σκέπας

    ἦν ἀνέμοιο Od.5.443

    ; κτεῖνον δ' ἐ. μηλοβοτῆρας as well, Il.18.529; esp. ἐ. δέ.. and besides.., Hdt.7.65,75, etc.;

    πολιαί τ' ἐ. ματέρες S. OT 182

     (lyr.).
    II. ἔπι, for ἔπεστι, there is, Il.1.515, 3.45, Od.16.315; οὐ γὰρ ἔπ' ἀνήρ.. there is no man.., 2.58; σοὶ δ' ἔ. μὲν μορφὴ

    ἐπέων 11.367

    ;

    ἔ. δέ μοι γέρας A.Eu. 393

     codd. (lyr.).
    F. PROSODY: in ἐπιόψομαι, ι is not elided before a vowel; also in some words where σ or ϝ has been lost, as ἐπιάλμενος, ἐπιείκελος, ἐπιεικής, ἐπιέξομαι (v.

    ἐπέχω v11

    ). [dialect] Dor. ἐπιεργάζομαι (v. ἐπιεργάζομαι).
    G. IN COMPOSITION:
    I. of Place, denoting,
    1. Support or Rest upon, ἔπειμι (A), ἐπίκειμαι, ἐπικαθίζω, ἐπαυχένιος, ἐπιβώμιος, etc.
    2. Motion,
    a. upon or over, ἐπιβαίνω, ἐπιτρέχω.
    b. to or towards, ἐπέρχομαι, ἐπιστέλλω, ἐπαρίστερος, ἐπιδέξιος.
    c. against,

    ἐπαΐσσω, ἐπιπλέω 11

    , ἐπιστρατεύω, ἐπιβουλεύω.
    e. over a place, as in ἐπαιωρέομαι, ἐπαρτάω.
    f. over or beyond boundaries, as in ἐπινέμομαι.
    g. implying reciprocity, as in ἐπιγαμία.
    3. Extension over a surface, as in ἐπαλείφω, ἐπανθίζω,

    ἐπιπέτομαι, ἐπιπλέω 1

    , ἐπάργυρος, ἐπίχρυσος.
    4. Accumulation of one thing over or besides another, as in ἐπαγείρω, ἐπιμανθάνω, ἐπαυξάνω, ἐπιβάλλω, ἐπίκτητος.
    5. Accompaniment, to, with, as in ἐπᾴδω, ἐπαυλέω, ἐπαγρυπνέω: hence of Addition, ἐπίτριτος one and 1/3 more, 1 +1/3; so ἐπιτέταρτος, ἐπίπεμπτος, ἐπόγδοος, etc.
    6. with Adjs., somewhat, slightly, as in ἐπίξανθος, ἐπίπικρος.
    II. of Time and Sequence, after, as in ἐπιβιόω, ἐπιβλαστάνω, ἐπιγίγνομαι,

    ἐπακόλουθος, ἐπίγονος, ἐπιστάτης 1.2

    .
    III. in causal senses:
    1. Superiority felt over or at, as in ἐπιχαίρω, ἐπιγελάω, ἐπαισχύνομαι.
    2. Authority over, as in ἐπικρατέω, ἔπαρχος, ἐπιβουκόλος, ἐπιποιμήν.
    3. Motive for, as in ἐπιθυμέω, ἐπιζήμιος, ἐπιθάνατος.
    4. to give force or intensity to the Verb, as in ἐπαινέω, ἐπιμέμφομαι, ἐπικείρω, ἐπικλάω.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπί

  • 11 БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

    Мы приняли следующие сокращения для наиболее часто упоминаемых книг и журналов:
    IJP - International Journal of Psycho-analysis
    JAPA - Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association
    SE - Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, ed. James Strachey (London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psycho-Analysis, 1953—74.)
    PSOC - Psychoanalytic Study of the Child (New Haven: Yale University Press)
    PQ - Psychoanalytic Quarterly
    WAF - The Writings of Anna Freud, ed. Anna Freud (New York: International Universities Press, 1966—74)
    PMC - Psychoanalysis The Major Concepts ed. Burness E. Moore and Bernard D. Fine (New Haven: Yale University Press)
    \
    О словаре: _about - Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts
    \
    1. Abend, S. M. Identity. PMC. Forthcoming.
    2. Abend, S. M. (1974) Problems of identity. PQ, 43.
    3. Abend, S. M., Porder, M. S. & Willick, M. S. (1983) Borderline Patients. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    4. Abraham, K. (1916) The first pregenital stage of libido. Selected Papers. London, Hogarth Press, 1948.
    5. Abraham, K. (1917) Ejaculatio praecox. In: selected Papers. New York Basic Books.
    6. Abraham, K. (1921) Contributions to the theory of the anal character. Selected Papers. New York: Basic Books, 1953.
    7. Abraham, K. (1924) A Short study of the development of the libido, viewed in the light of mental disorders. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1927.
    8. Abraham, K. (1924) Manic-depressive states and the pre-genital levels of the libido. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1949.
    9. Abraham, K. (1924) Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1948.
    10. Abraham, K. (1924) The influence of oral erotism on character formation. Ibid.
    11. Abraham, K. (1925) The history of an impostor in the light of psychoanalytic knowledge. In: Clinical Papers and Essays on Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books, 1955, vol. 2.
    12. Abrams, S. (1971) The psychoanalytic unconsciousness. In: The Unconscious Today, ed. M. Kanzer. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    13. Abrams, S. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.
    14. Abse, D W. (1985) The depressive character In Depressive States and their Treatment, ed. V. Volkan New York: Jason Aronson.
    15. Abse, D. W. (1985) Hysteria and Related Mental Disorders. Bristol: John Wright.
    16. Ackner, B. (1954) Depersonalization. J. Ment. Sci., 100.
    17. Adler, A. (1924) Individual Psychology. New York: Harcourt, Brace.
    18. Akhtar, S. (1984) The syndrome of identity diffusion. Amer. J. Psychiat., 141.
    19. Alexander, F. (1950) Psychosomatic Medicine. New York: Norton.
    20. Allen, D. W. (1974) The Feat- of Looking. Charlottesvill, Va: Univ. Press of Virginia.
    21. Allen, D. W. (1980) Psychoanalytic treatment of the exhibitionist. In: Exhibitionist, Description, Assessment, and Treatment, ed. D. Cox. New York: Garland STPM Press.
    22. Allport, G. (1937) Personality. New York: Henry Holt.
    23. Almansi, R. J. (1960) The face-breast equation. JAPA, 6.
    24. Almansi, R. J. (1979) Scopophilia and object loss. PQ, 47.
    25. Altman, L. Z. (1969) The Dream in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    26. Altman, L. Z. (1977) Some vicissitudes of love. JAPA, 25.
    27. American Psychiatric Association. (1987) Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3d ed. revised. Washington, D. C.
    28. Ansbacher, Z. & Ansbacher, R. (1956) The Individual Psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.
    29. Anthony, E. J. (1981) Shame, guilt, and the feminine self in psychoanalysis. In: Object and Self, ed. S. Tuttman, C. Kaye & M. Zimmerman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    30. Arlow. J. A. (1953) Masturbation and symptom formation. JAPA, 1.
    31. Arlow. J. A. (1959) The structure of the deja vu experience. JAPA, 7.
    32. Arlow. J. A. (1961) Ego psychology and the study of mythology. JAPA, 9.
    33. Arlow. J. A. (1963) Conflict, regression and symptom formation. IJP, 44.
    34. Arlow. J. A. (1966) Depersonalization and derealization. In: Psychoanalysis: A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    35. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Fantasy, memory and reality testing. PQ, 38.
    36. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Unconscious fantasy and disturbances of mental experience. PQ, 38.
    37. Arlow. J. A. (1970) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 51.
    38. Arlow. J. A. (1975) The structural hypothesis. PQ, 44.
    39. Arlow. J. A. (1977) Affects and the psychoanalytic situation. IJP, 58.
    40. Arlow. J. A. (1979) Metaphor and the psychoanalytic situation. PQ, 48.
    41. Arlow. J. A. (1979) The genesis of interpretation. JAPA, 27 (suppl.).
    42. Arlow. J. A. (1982) Problems of the superego concept. PSOC, 37.
    43. Arlow. J. A. (1984) Disturbances of the sense of time. PQ, 53.
    44. Arlow. J. A. (1985) Some technical problems of countertransference. PQ, 54.
    45. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1963) Psychoanalytic Concepts and the Structural Theory, New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    46. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1969) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 50.
    47. Asch, S. S. (1966) Depression. PSOC, 21.
    48. Asch, S. S. (1976) Varieties of negative therapeutic reactions and problems of technique. JAPA, 24.
    49. Atkins, N. (1970) The Oedipus myth. Adolescence, and the succession of generations. JAPA, 18.
    50. Atkinson, J. W. & Birch, D. (1970) The Dynamics of Action. New York: Wiley.
    51. Bachrach, H. M. & Leaff, L. A. (1978) Analyzability. JAPA, 26.
    52. Bacon, C. (1956) A developmental theory of female homosexuality. In: Perversions,ed, S. Lorand & M. Balint. New York: Gramercy.
    53. Bak, R. C. (1953) Fetishism. JAPA. 1.
    54. Bak, R. C. (1968) The phallic woman. PSOC, 23.
    55. Bak, R. C. & Stewart, W. A. (1974) Fetishism, transvestism, and voyeurism. An American Handbook of Psychiatry, ed. S. Arieti. New York: Basic Books, vol. 3.
    56. Balint, A. (1949) Love for mother and mother-love. IJP, 30.
    57. Balter, L., Lothane, Z. & Spencer, J. H. (1980) On the analyzing instrument, PQ, 49.
    58. Basch, M. F. (1973) Psychoanalysis and theory formation. Ann. Psychoanal., 1.
    59. Basch, M. F. (1976) The concept of affect. JAPA, 24.
    60. Basch, M. F. (1981) Selfobject disorders and psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 29.
    61. Basch, M. F. (1983) Emphatic understanding. JAPA. 31.
    62. Balldry, F. Character. PMC. Forthcoming.
    63. Balldry, F. (1983) The evolution of the concept of character in Freud's writings. JAPA. 31.
    64. Begelman, D. A. (1971) Misnaming, metaphors, the medical model and some muddles. Psychiatry, 34.
    65. Behrends, R. S. & Blatt, E. J. (1985) Internalization and psychological development throughout the life cycle. PSOC, 40.
    66. Bell, A. (1961) Some observations on the role of the scrotal sac and testicles JAPA, 9.
    67. Benedeck, T. (1949) The psychosomatic implications of the primary unit. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 19.
    68. Beres, C. (1958) Vicissitudes of superego functions and superego precursors in childhood. FSOC, 13.
    69. Beres, D. Conflict. PMC. Forthcoming.
    70. Beres, D. (1956) Ego deviation and the concept of schizophrenia. PSOC, 11.
    71. Beres, D. (1960) Perception, imagination and reality. IJP, 41.
    72. Beres, D. (1960) The psychoanalytic psychology of imagination. JAPA, 8.
    73. Beres, D. & Joseph, E. D. (1965) Structure and function in psychoanalysis. IJP, 46.
    74. Beres, D. (1970) The concept of mental representation in psychoanalysis. IJP, 51.
    75. Berg, M D. (1977) The externalizing transference. IJP, 58.
    76. Bergeret, J. (1985) Reflection on the scientific responsi bilities of the International Psychoanalytical Association. Memorandum distributed at 34th IPA Congress, Humburg.
    77. Bergman, A. (1978) From mother to the world outside. In: Grolnick et. al. (1978).
    78. Bergmann, M. S. (1980) On the intrapsychic function of falling in love. PQ, 49.
    79. Berliner, B. (1966) Psychodynamics of the depressive character. Psychoanal. Forum, 1.
    80. Bernfeld, S. (1931) Zur Sublimierungslehre. Imago, 17.
    81. Bibring, E. (1937) On the theory of the therapeutic results of psychoanalysis. IJP, 18.
    82. Bibring, E. (1941) The conception of the repetition compulsion. PQ, 12.
    83. Bibring, E. (1953) The mechanism of depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    84. Bibring, E. (1954) Psychoanalysis and the dynamic psychotherapies. JAPA, 2.
    85. Binswanger, H. (1963) Positive aspects of the animus. Zьrich: Spring.
    86. Bion Francesca Abingdon: Fleetwood Press.
    87. Bion, W. R. (1952) Croup dynamics. IJP, 33.
    88. Bion, W. R. (1961) Experiences in Groups. London: Tavistock.
    89. Bion, W. R. (1962) A theory of thinking. IJP, 40.
    90. Bion, W. R. (1962) Learning from Experience. London: William Heinemann.
    91. Bion, W. R. (1963) Elements of Psychoanalysis. London: William Heinemann.
    92. Bion, W. R. (1965) Transformations. London: William Heinemann.
    93. Bion, W. R. (1970) Attention and Interpretation. London: Tavistock.
    94. Bion, W. R. (1985) All My Sins Remembered, ed. Francesca Bion. Adingdon: Fleetwood Press.
    95. Bird, B. (1972) Notes on transference. JAPA, 20.
    96. Blanck, G. & Blanck, R. (1974) Ego Psychology. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.
    97. Blatt, S. J. (1974) Levels of object representation in anaclitic and introjective depression. PSOC, 29.
    98. Blau, A. (1955) A unitary hypothesis of emotion. PQ, 24.
    99. Bleuler, E. (1911) Dementia Praecox or the Group of Schizophrenias. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1951.
    100. Blos, P. (1954) Prolonged adolescence. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 24.
    101. Blos, P. (1962) On Adolescence. New York: Free Press.
    102. Blos, P. (1972) The epigenesia of the adult neurosis. 27.
    103. Blos, P. (1979) Modification in the traditional psychoanalytic theory of adolescent development. Adolescent Psychiat., 8.
    104. Blos, P. (1984) Son and father. JAPA_. 32.
    105. Blum, G. S. (1963) Prepuberty and adolescence, In Studies ed. R. E. Grinder. New York: McMillan.
    106. Blum, H. P. Symbolism. FMC. Forthcoming.
    107. Blum, H. P. (1976) Female Psychology. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    108. Blum, H. P. (1976) Masochism, the ego ideal and the psychology of women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    109. Blum, H. P. (1980) The value of reconstruction in adult psychoanalysis. IJP, 61.
    110. Blum, H. P. (1981) Forbidden quest and the analytic ideal. PQ, 50.
    111. Blum, H. P. (1983) Defense and resistance. Foreword. JAFA, 31.
    112. Blum, H. P., Kramer, Y., Richards, A. K. & Richards, A. D., eds. (1988) Fantasy, Myth and Reality: Essays in Honor of Jacob A. Arlow. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.
    113. Boehm, F. (1930) The femininity-complex In men. IJP,11.
    114. Boesky, D. Structural theory. PMC. Forthcoming.
    115. Boesky, D. (1973) Deja raconte as a screen defense. PQ, 42.
    116. Boesky, D. (1982) Acting out. IJP, 63.
    117. Boesky, D. (1986) Questions about Sublimation In Psychoanalysis the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    118. Bornstein, B. (1935) Phobia in a 2 1/2-year-old child. PQ, 4.
    119. Bornstein, B. (1951) On latency. PSOC, 6.
    120. Bornstein, M., ed. (1983) Values and neutrality in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 3.
    121. Bowlby, J. (1960) Grief and morning in infancy and early childhood. PSOC. 15.
    122. Bowlby, J. (1961) Process of mourning. IJP. 42.
    123. Bowlby, J. (1980) Attachment and Loss, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.
    124. Bradlow, P. A. (1973) Depersonalization, ego splitting, non-human fantasy and shame. IJP, 54.
    125. Brazelton, T. B., Kozlowsky, B. & Main, M. (1974) The early motherinfant interaction. In: The Effect of the Infant on Its Caregiver, ed. M. Lewis & L. Rosenblum New York Wiley.
    126. Brenner, C. (1957) The nature and development of the concept of repression in Freud's writings. PSOC, 12.
    127. Brenner, C. (1959) The masochistic character. JAPA, 7.
    128. Brenner, C. (1973) An Elementary Textbook of Psycho-analysis. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    129. Brenner, C. (1974) On the nature and development of affects PQ, 43.
    130. Brenner, C. (1976) Psychoanalytic Technique and Psychic Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    131. Brenner, C. (1979) The Mind in Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    132. Brenner, C. (1979) Working alliance, therapeutic alliance and transference. JAPA, 27.
    133. Brenner, C. (1981) Defense and defense mechanisms. PQ, 50.
    134. Brenner, C. (1983) Defense. In: the Mind in Conflict. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    135. Bressler, B. (1965) The concept of the self. Psychoanalytic Review, 52.
    136. Breuer, J. & Freud, S. (1983—95) Studies on Hysteria. SE, 3.
    137. Breznitz, S., ed. (1983) The Denial of Stress. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    138. Brody, S. (1964) Passivity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    139. Brown, H. (1970) Psycholinquistics. New York: Free Press.
    140. Bruner, J. S. (1964) The course of cognitive growth. Amer. Psychologist. 19.
    141. Bruner, J., Jolly, A. & Sylva, K. (1976) Play. New York Basic Books.
    142. Bruner, J. E., Olver, R. R. &Greenfield, P. M. (1966) Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: Wiley.
    143. Buie, D H. (1981) Empathy. JAPA, 29.
    144. Burgner, M. & Edgeumble, R. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relationships. PSOC, 27.
    145. Call, J. ed. (1979) Basic Handbook of Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.
    146. Carroll, G. (1956) Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge & London: M. I. T. Press & John Wiley.
    147. Cavenar, J. O. & Nash, J. L. (1976) The effects of Combat on the normal personality. Comprehensive Psychiat., 17.
    148. Chassequet-Smirgel, J. (1978) Reflections on the connection between perversion and sadism. IJP, 59.
    149. Chomsky, N. (1978) Language and unconscious knowledge. In: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, vol. 3.
    150. Clower, V. (1975) Significance of masturbation in female sexual development and function. In: Masturbation from Infancy to Senescence, ed. I. Marcus & J. Francis. New York: Int. Uni" Press.
    151. Coen, S. J. & Bradlow, P. A. (1982) Twin transference as a compromise formation. JAPA, 30.
    152. Compton, A. Object and relationships. PMC. Forthcoming.
    153. Cullen, W. (1777) First Lines of the Practice of Psysic. Edinburgh: Bell, Brandfute.
    154. Curtis, B. C. (1969) Psychoanalytic understanding and treatment of impotence. In: Sexual Function and Dysfunction, ed. P. J. Fink & V. B. O. Hummett. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.
    155. Darwin, C. (1874) The Descent of Man. New York: Hurst.
    156. Davidoff-Hirsch, H. (1985) Oedipal and preoedipal phenomena. JAPA, 33.
    157. Davis, M. & Wallbridge, D. (1981) Boundary and Space. New York: Brunner-Mazel.
    158. Deutsch, H. (1932) Homosexuality in women. PQ, 1.
    159. Deutsch, H. (1934) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.
    160. Deutsch, H. (1937) Absence of grief. PQ, 6.
    161. Deutsch, H. (1942) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.
    162. Deutsch, H. (1955) The impostor. In: Neuroses and Character Types. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.
    163. Devereux, G. (1953) Why Oedipus killed Lains. IJP, 34.
    164. Dewald, P. (1982) Psychoanalytic perspectives On resistance. In: resistance, Psychodynamics. and Behavioral Approaches, ed. P. Wachtel. New York: Plenum Press.
    165. Dickes, R. (1963) Fetishistic behavior. JAPA. 11.
    166. Dickes, R. (1965) The defensive function of an altered state of consciousness. JAPA, 13.
    167. Dickes, R. (1967) Severe regressive disruption of the therapeutic alliance. JAPA, 15.
    168. Dickes, R. (1981) Sexual myths and misinformation. In: Understanding Human Behaviour in Health and Illness, ed. R. C. Simon & H. Pardes. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    169. Dorpat, T. L. (1985) Denial and Defense in the Therapeutic Situation. New York: Jason Aronson.
    170. Downey, T. W. (1978) Transitional phenomena in the analysis of early adolescent males. PSOC, 33.
    171. Dunbar, F. (1954) Emotions and Bodily Functions. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.
    172. Easson, W. M. (1973) The earliest ego development, primitive memory traces, and the Isakower phenomenon. PQ, 42.
    173. Edelheit, H. (1971) Mythopoiesis and the primal scene. Psychoanal. Study Society, 5.
    174. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relation ships, part I. PSOC, 27.
    175. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1975) The phallicnarcissistic phase. PSOC, 30.
    176. Eidelberg, L. (1960) A third contribution to the study of slips of the tongue. IJP, 41.
    177. Eidelberg, L. (1968) Encyclopedia of Psychoanalysis. New York: The Free Press; London: Collier-MacMillan.
    178. Eissler, K. R. (1953) The effect of the structure of the ego on psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 1.
    179. Ellenberg, H. F. (1970) The Discovery of the Unconscious. New York: Basic Books.
    180. Emde, R. N. (1980) Toward a psychoanalytic theory of affect: I. & G. H. Pollock. Washington NYMH.
    181. Emde R., Gaensbaner, T. & Harmon R. (1976) Emotional Expression in Infancy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    182. Erode R. & Harmon, R. J. (1972) Endogenous and exogenous smiling systems in early infancy. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 11.
    183. Engel, G. L. (1962) Psychological Development in Health and Disease. New York Saunders.
    184. Engel, G. L. (1967) Psychoanalytic theory of somatic disorder. JAPA, 15.
    185. Engel, G. L. (1968) A reconsideration of the role of conversion in somatic disease. Compr. Psychiat., 94.
    186. English, H. B. & English, A. C. (1958) A comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psychoanalytical Terms. New York: David McKay.
    187. Erard, R. (1983) New wine in old skins. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 10.
    188. Erdelyi, M. H. (1985) Psychoanalysis. New York: W. H. Freeman.
    189. Erikson, E. H. (1950) Childhood and Society. New York: Norton.
    190. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The concept of ego identity. JAPA, 4.
    191. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The problem of ego identity. JAPA, 4.
    192. Esman, A. H. (1973) The primal scene. PSOC, 28.
    193. Esman, A. H. (1975) The Psychology of Adolescence. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    194. Esman, A. H. (1979) Some reflections on boredom. JAPA, 27.
    195. Esman, A. H. (1983) The "stimulus barrier": a review and reconsideration. PSOC, 38.
    196. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1952) Psychoanalytic Studies of the Personality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
    197. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1954) An Object-Relations Theory of the Personality. New York: Basic Books.
    198. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1963) Synopsis of an Object-Relations theory of the personality. IJP, 44.
    199. Fawcett, J., Clark, D. C., Scheftner, W. H. & Hedecker, D. (1983) Differences between anhedonia and normal hedonic depressive states. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 40.
    200. Fenichel, O. (1934) On the psychology of boredom. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, 1953, vol. 1.
    201. Fenichel, O. (1941) Problems of Psychoanalytic Technique. Albany, N. Y.: Psychoanalytic Quaterly.
    202. Fenichel, O. (1945) Character disorders. In: The Psychoanalytic Theory of the Neurosis. New York: Norton.
    203. Fenichel, O. (1945) The Psychoanalytic Theory of Neurosis New York: Norton.
    204. Fenichel, O. (1954) Ego strength and ego weakness. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, vol. 2.
    205. Ferenczi, S. (1909) Introjection and transference. In: Sex in Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.
    206. Ferenczi, S. (191617) Disease or patho-neurosis. The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1950.
    207. Ferenczi, S. (1925) Psychoanalysis of sexual habits. In: The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.
    208. Fine, B. D., Joseph, E. D. & Waldhorn, H. F., eds. (1971) Recollection and Reconstruction in Psychoanalysis. Monograph 4, Kris Study Group. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    209. Fink, G. (1967) Analysis of the Isakower phenomenon. JAPA, 15.
    210. Fink, P. J. (1970) Correlation between "actual" neurosis and the work of Masters and Johson. P. Q, 39.
    211. Finkenstein, L. (1975) Awe premature ejaculation. P. Q, 44.
    212. Firestein, S. K. (1978) A review of the literature. In: Termination in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    213. Fisher, C. et. al. (1957) A study of the preliminary stages of the construction of dreams and images. JAPA, 5.
    214. Fisher, C. et. al. (1968) Cycle of penile erection synchronous with dreaming (REM) sleep. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 12.
    215. Fliess, R. (1942) The metapsychology of the analyst. PQ, 12.
    216. Fliess, R. (1953) The Revival of Interest in the Dream. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    217. Fodor, N. & Gaynor, F. (1950) Freud: Dictionary of Psycho-analysis. New York: Philosophical Library.
    218. Fordham, M. (1969) Children as Individuals. London: Hodder & Stoughton.
    219. Fordham, M. (1976) The Self and Autism. London: Academic Press.
    220. Fraiberg, S. (1969) Object constancy and mental representation. PSOC, 24.
    221. Frank, A. Metapsychology. PMS. Forthcoming.
    222. Frank, A. & Muslin, H. (1967) The development of Freud's concept of primal repression. PSOC, 22.
    223. Frank, H. (1977) Dynamic patterns for failure in college students. Can. Psychiat. Ass. J., 22.
    224. French, T. & Fromm, E. (1964) Dream Interpretation. New York: Basic Books.
    225. Freud, A. (1936) The Ego and the Mechanisms of Defense. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    226. Freud, A. (1951) Observations on child development. PSOC, 6.
    227. Freud, A. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. WAF, 4.
    228. Freud, A. (1958) Adolescence. WAF, 5.
    229. Freud, A. (1962) Assessment of childhood disturbances. PSOC, 17.
    230. Freud, A. (1962) Comments on psychic trauma. In: Furst (1967).
    231. Freud, A. (1963) The concept of developmental lines. PSOC, 18.
    232. Freud, A. (1965) Assessment of pathology, part 2. WAF, 6.
    233. Freud, A. (1965) Normality and Pathology in Childhood. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    234. Freud, A. (1970) The infantile neurosis. WAF, 7.
    235. Freud, A. (1971) Comments on aggression. IJP, 53.
    236. Freud, A. (1971) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 26.
    237. Freud, A. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.
    238. Freud, S. (1887—1902) Letters to Wilhelm Fliess. New York: Basic Books, 1954.
    239. Freud, S. (1891) On the interpretation of the aphasias. SE, 3.
    240. Freud, S. (1893—95) Studies on hysteria. SE, 2.
    241. Freud, S. (1894) The neuropsychoses of defence. SE, 3.
    242. Freud, S. (1895) On the ground for detaching a particular syndrome from neurasthenia under the description "anxiety neurosis". SE, 3.
    243. Freud, S. (1895) Project for a scientific psychology. SE, 1.
    244. Freud, S. (1896) Draft K, Jameary 1, 1896, Neuroses of defense (A Christmas fairytale). In: Extracts from the Fliess papers (1892—99).
    245. Freud, S. (1896) Further remarks on the neuropsychosis of defense. SE, 3.
    246. Freud, S. (1896) Heredity and aetiology of neurosis. SE, 3.
    247. Freud, S. (1898) Sexuality in the aetiology of the neurosis. SE, 3.
    248. Freud, S. (1899) Screen memories. SE, 3.
    249. Freud, S. (1900) The interpretation of dreams. SE, 4—5.
    250. Freud, S. (1901) Childhood memories and screen memories SE, 6.
    251. Freud, S. (1901) On dreams. SE, 5.
    252. Freud, S. (1901) The psychopathology of everyday life. SE, 6.
    253. Freud, S. (1905) Fragments of an analysis of a case of hysteria. SE, 7.
    254. Freud, S. (1905) Jokes and their relation to the unconscious. SE, 8.
    255. Freud, S. (1905) Psysical (or mental) treatment. SE, 7.
    256. Freud, S. (1905) Three essays on the theory of sexuality. SE. 7.
    257. Freud, S. (1908) Character and anal erotism. SE, 9.
    258. Freud, S. (1908) On the sexual theories of children. SE, 9.
    259. Freud, S. (1908) Preface to Wilhelm Stekel's Nervous Anxiety-States and Their Treatment. SE, 9.
    260. Freud, S. (1909) Analysis of a phobia in a five-year-old boy. SE, 10.
    261. Freud, S. (1909) Family romances. SE, 9.
    262. Freud, S. (1909) Notes upon a case of obsessional neurosis. SE, 10.
    263. Freud, S. (1910) A special type of choice of object made by men. SE, 11.
    264. Freud, S. (1910) The autithentical meaning of primal words. SE, 11.
    265. Freud, S. (1910) The future prospects of psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 11.
    266. Freud, S. (1910) The psychoanalytic view of psychogenic disturbance of vision. SE, 11.
    267. Freud, S. (1911) Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. SE, 12.
    268. Freud, S. (1911) Notes on a case of paranoia. SE, 12.
    269. Freud, S. (1911) Psychoanalytic notes on an autobiographical account of a case of paranoia. SE, 12.
    270. Freud, S. (1911—15) Papers on technique. SE, 12.
    271. Freud, S. (1912) Contribution to a discussion on masturbation. SE, 12.
    272. Freud, S. (1912) On the universal tendency to abasement in the sphere of love. SE, 11.
    273. Freud, S. (1912) The dynamics of transference. SE, 12.
    274. Freud, S. (1913) Editor's note The disposition to obsessional neurosis. SE, 12.
    275. Freud, S. (1913) On beginning the treatment. SE, 12.
    276. Freud, S. (1913) Totem and taboo. SE, 13.
    277. Freud, S. (1914) Fausse reconnaissance (deja reconte) in psychoanalytic treatment. SE, 13.
    278. Freud, S. (1914) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 15.
    279. Freud, S. (1914) Observations on transference love. SE, 12.
    280. Freud, S. (1914) On narcissism. SE. 14.
    281. Freud, S. (1914) On the history of the psychoanalytic movement. SE, 14.
    282. Freud, S. (1914) Remembering, repeating, and working-through. SE, 12.
    283. Freud, S. (1914—16) Some character types met with in psychoanalysis. (II) Those wrecked by success SE, 14.
    284. Freud, S. (1915) Das UnbewuЯte. Gesammelte Werke, 10.
    285. Freud, S. (1915) Instincts and their vicissitudes. SE, 14.
    286. Freud, S. (1915) Observation on transference-love. SE, I2.
    287. Freud, S. (1915) Repression. SE, 14.
    288. Freud, S. (1915) The unconscious. SE, 14.
    289. Freud, S. (1915—17) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 15 & 16.
    290. Freud, S. (1916) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.
    291. Freud, S. (1916) Some character types met with in psychoanalytic work. SE, 16.
    292. Freud, S. (1917) A metapsychological supplement to the theory of dreams. SE, 14.
    293. Freud, S. (1917) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.
    294. Freud, S. (1917) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 14.
    295. Freud, S. (1917) On transformations of instinct as exemplified in anal erotism. SE, 17.
    296. Freud, S. (1918) From the history of an infantile neurosis. SE, 17.
    297. Freud, S. (1919) "A child is being beaten". SE, 17.
    298. Freud, S. (1919) Lines of advance in psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 17.
    299. Freud, S. (1919) The uncanny. SE, 17.
    300. Freud, S. (1920) Beyond the pleasure principle. SE, 18.
    301. Freud, S. (1920) The Psychogenesis of a case of homosexuality in a woman. SE, 18.
    302. Freud, S. (1921) Group psychology and the analysis of the ego. SE, 18.
    303. Freud, S. (1923) The ego and the id. SE, 19.
    304. Freud, S. (1923) The infantile genital organization. SE, 19.
    305. Freud, S. (1924) A short account of psychoanalysis. SE, 19.
    306. Freud, S. (1924) Neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.
    307. Freud, S. (1924) The dissolution of the Oedipus complex SE, 19.
    308. Freud, S. (1924) The economic problem of masochism. SE, 19.
    309. Freud, S. (1924) The loss of reality in neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.
    310. Freud, S. (1925) Negation. SE, 19.
    311. Freud, S. (1925) Some psychical consequences of the anatomical distinction between the sexes. SE, 19.
    312. Freud, S. (1926) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety. SE, 20.
    313. Freud, S. (1926) The question of lay analysis. SE, 20.
    314. Freud, S. (1927) Fetishism. SE, 21.
    315. Freud, S. (1930) Civilization and its discontents. SE, 21.
    316. Freud, S. (1931) Female sexuality. SE, 21.
    317. Freud, S. (1931) Libidinal types. SE, 21.
    318. Freud, S. (1933) Femininity. SE, 22,.
    319. Freud, S. (1933) New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. SE, 22.
    320. Freud, S. (1933) The psychology of women. New introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 22.
    321. Freud, S. (1936) A disturbance of memory on the Acropolis. SE, 22.
    322. Freud, S. (1937) Analysis terminable and interminable. SE, 23.
    323. Freud, S. (1937) Constructions in analysis. SE, 23.
    324. Freud, S. (1938) An outline on psychoanalysis. SE, 23.
    325. Freud, S. (1938) Splitting of the ego in the process of defense. SE, 23.
    326. Freud, S. (1939) Moses and monotheism. SE, 23.
    327. Freud, S. (1940) An outline of psychoanalysis. SE, 23.
    328. Frosch, J. (1966) A note on reality constancy. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    329. Frosch, J. (1967) Delusional fixity sense of conviction and the psychotic conflict. IJP, 48.
    330. Frosch, J. (1977) The relation between acting out and disorders of impulse control. Psychiatry, 40.
    331. Frosch, J. (1980) Neurosis and psychosis. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. J. Greenspan & G. H. Pollock. Washington, D. C.: National Institute of Health, vol. 3.
    332. Frosch, J. (1983) The Psychotic Process. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    333. Furer, M. (1972) The history of the superego concept in psychoanalysis. In: Moral Value and the Superego concept in Psychoanalysis, ed. S. C. Fost. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    334. Furman, E. (1974) A Child s Parent Dies. New Heaven: Yale Univ. Press.
    335. Furman, E. (1980) Transference and externalization. PSOC, 35.
    336. Furst, S. Trauma. PMC, Forthcoming.
    337. Furst, S. (1967) Psychic trauma. In: Psychic Trauma, ed. S. S. Furst. New York: Basic Books.
    338. Furst, S. (1978) The stimulus barrier and the pathogenecity of trauma. IJP, 59.
    339. Gaddini, R. (1978) Transitional object and the psychosomatic symptom. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).
    340. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1976) Some suggested revisions concerning early female development. JAPA, 24(5).
    341. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1980) The preoedipal development of the boy. JAPA, 28.
    342. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1981) Infantile Origins of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    343. Ganzarain, R. Group psychology. PMC. Forthcoming.
    344. Ganzarain, R. (1980) Psychotic-like anxieties and primitive defenses. Issues on Ego Psychology, 3(2).
    345. Ganzarain, R. (1988) A comparative study of Bion's concepts about groups. In: Object Relations Group Psychotherapy. Madison, Ct.: Int. Univ. Press.
    346. Gediman, H. K. (1971) The concept of the stimulus barrier. IJP, 52.
    347. Gedo, J. & Goldberg, A. (1973) Models of the Mind. Chicago & London: Univ. of Chicago Press.
    348. Geerts, A. E. & Prechardt, E., reporters (1978) Colloquium on "trauma". IJP, 59.
    349. Gero, G. (1943) The idea of psychogenesis in modern psychiatry and in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Rev., 30.
    350. Gill. M. M. (1963) Topography and Systems in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, Monogr. 10. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    351. Gill. M. M. (1967) The primary process in motives and thought. In: Motives and Thought, ed. R. R. Holt. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    352. Gill. M. M. (1974) Psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.
    353. Gill, M. M & Rapaport, D. (1942) A case of amnesia and its bearing on the theory of memory. Character and Personality, 11.
    354. Gillespie, W. (1956) The general theory of Sexual perversion. IJP, 37.
    355. Glenn, J. (in press) A parameter. In: Annu. Psychoanal.
    356. Glenn, J. & Kaplan, E. H. (1968) Types of orgasm in women. JAPA, 16.
    357. Glower, E. (1929) The "screening" function of traumatic memories. IJP, 4.
    358. Glower, E. (1931) Sublimation, substitution, and social anxiety. IJP, 12.
    359. Glower, E. (1933) The relation of perversion-formation to the development of reality sense. IJP, 14.
    360. Glower, E. (1955) The terminal phase. In: The Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    361. Goldberg, A. (1975) The evolution of psychoanalytic concepts of depression. In: Depression and Human Existence, ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.
    362. Goldberg, A. ed. (1978) The Psychology of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    363. Goldberg, A. (1983) Self psychology and alternate perspectives on internalization. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    364. Green, A. (1978) Potential space in Psychoanalysis. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).
    365. Greenacre, P. (1949) A contribution to the study of screen memories. FSOC, 3/4.
    366. Greenacre, P. (1950) General problems of acting out. PQ, 19.
    367. Greenacre, P. (1950) Special problems of early female sexual development. In: Trauma, Growth and Personality New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    368. Greenacre, P. (1952) Pregenital patterning. IJP, 33.
    369. Greenacre, P. (1953) Penis awe and its relation to penis envy. In: Drives, Affects, Behavior, ed. R. M. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    370. Greenacre, P. (1956) Experiences of awe in childhood. PSOC,11.
    371. Greenacre, P. (1957) The childhood of the artist. PSOC, 12.
    372. Greenacre, P. (1958) The family romance of the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 2.
    373. Greenacre, P. (1958) The relation of the impostor to the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 1.
    374. Greenacre, P. (1968) Perversions. PSOC, 23.
    375. Greenacre, P. (1969) The fetish and the transitional object, part 1. PSOC, 24.
    376. Greenacre, P. (1970) The fetish and the transitional object, part 2. IJP 51, vol. 4.
    377. Greenacre, P. (1970) The transitional object and the fetish. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    378. Greenacre, P. (1972) Crowds and crisis. PSOC, 27.
    379. Greenacre, P. (1973) The primal scene and the sense of reality. PQ, 42.
    380. Greenacre, P. (1975) On reconstruction. JAPA, 21.
    381. Greenberg, J. R. & Mitchell, S. A. (1983) Object Relations in Psychoanalytic Theory. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    382. Greenson, R. R. (1949) The psychology of apathy. PQ, 18.
    383. Greenson, R. R. (1953) On boredom. JAPA, 1.
    384. Greenson, R. R. (1960) Empathy and its vicissitudes. IJP, 41.
    385. Greenson, R. R. (1962) On enthusiasm. JAPA, 10.
    386. Greenson, R. R. (1965) The working alliance and the transference neurosis. PQ, 34.
    387. Greenson, R. R. (1967) The technique and Practice of Psycho-analysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    388. Greenson, R. R. (1978) Exploration in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    389. Greenspan, S. & Pollock, G., eds. (1980) The Course of Life. Vol. I. Washington, D. C.: U. S. Government Printing office.
    390. Grinberg, L., Sor, D. & Tabak de Bianchedi, E. (1975) Introduction to the Work of Bion, trans. A. Hahn. Scotland: Clunie Press.
    391. Grinker, E. R (1945) Psychiatric disorders in combat crews overseas and in returnees. Med. Clin. North. Amer., 29.
    392. Grinstein, A. (1983) Freud's Rules of Dream Interpretation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    393. Grolnick, S., Barkin, L. & Muensterberger, W., eds. (1978) Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.
    394. Grosskurth, P. (1986) Melanie Klein. New York: Alfred Knopf.
    395. Grossman, W. E. & Stewart, W. A. (1976) Penis envy. JAPA, 24 (5).
    396. Grotstein, J. S. (1981) Splitting and Projective Indentification. New York: Jason Aronson.
    397. Guntrip, H. (1961) Personality Structure and Human Interaction. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    398. Guntrip, H. (1968) Schizoid Phenomena, Object-Relations and the Self. London: Hogarth Press.
    399. Harley, M. (1967) Transference developments in a five-year old child. In: the Child Analyst at Work, ed. E. Geleerd. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    400. Harley, M. (1974) Analyst and Adolescent at Work. New York: Quadrangle.
    401. Harley, M. (1986) Child analysis, 1947—1984, a retrospective. PSOC, 41.
    402. Harre, R. and Lamb, R. (1983) The Encyclopedia Dictionary of Psychology. Cambridge: M. I. T. Press.
    403. Harrison, J. B. (1975) On the maternal origins of awe. PSOC, 30.
    404. Harrison, J. B. (1979) On Freud's view of the infant-mother relationship and of the oceanic feeling. JAPA, 27.
    405. Harrison, S. J. (1970) Is psychoanalysis "our science?". JAPA, 18.
    406. Hartmann, H. PSOC, 5.
    407. Hartmann, H. (1937) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    408. Hartmann, H. (1939) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1958.
    409. Hartmann, H. (1939) Psychoanalysis and the concept of health. In: Hartmann (1964).
    410. Hartmann, H. (1947) On rational and irrational action. In: Essays on Ego Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1964.
    411. Hartmann, H. (1948) Comments on the theory of instinctual drives. PQ, 17.
    412. Hartmann, H. (1950) Comments on the psychoanalytic theory of the ego. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    413. Hartmann, H. (1951) Technical implications of ego psychology PQ, 20.
    414. Hartmann, H. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. PSOC, 7.
    415. Hartmann, H. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of schizophrenia. In: Hartmann, PSOC, 8.
    416. Hartmann, H. (1953) The metapsychology of schizophrenia. PSOC, 8.
    417. Hartmann, H. (1955) Notes on the theory of sublimation. PSOC, 10.
    418. Hartmann, H. (1956) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.
    419. Hartmann, H. (1964) Essays in Ego Psychology. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    420. Hartmann, H. (1964) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.
    421. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1946) Comments in the formation of psychic structure. PSOC, 2.
    422. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1949) Notes on the theory of aggression. PSOC, 3/4.
    423. Hartmann, H. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1962) Notes on the superego. PSOC, 17.
    424. Hassler, A. D. (1960) Guideposts of migrating fish. Science, 122.
    425. Hastings, D. W. (1963) Impotence and Frigidity. Boston: Little, Brown.
    426. Heimann, P. (1952) Certain functions of introjection and projection in early infancy. In: Klein et al. (1952).
    427. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1962) Notes on the anal stage IJP, 43.
    428. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1972) The psychoanalytical concept of aggression. IJP, 53.
    429. Hendrick, I. (1958) Facts and Theories of Psychoanalysis, 3rd ed. New York: Alfred Knopf.
    430. Hill, M. (1982) Analysis of transference. In: Theory and Technique, vol. 1. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    431. Hoffer, W. (1949) Mouth, hand, and ego integration. PSOC, 3/4.
    432. Holder, A. (1982) Preoedipal contributions to the formation of the superego. PSOC, 37.
    433. Holt, R. R. (1964) The emergence of cognitive psychology JAPA, 12.
    434. Holt, R. R. (1967) Beyond vitalism and mechanism. In: Science and Psychoanalysis, ed. J. H. Masserman. Hew York: Grune & Stratton, vol. 2.
    435. Hook, S. (1959) Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy. New York: Grove Press.
    436. Horney, K. (1924) On the genesis of the castration complex in women. IJP, 5.
    437. Horney, K. (1926) The flight from womanhood. IJP, 7.
    438. Horowitz, M. J. (1972) Modes of representation of thought. JAFA, 20.
    439. Horowitz, M. J. (1979) States of Mind, 2d. ed. New York: Plenum, 1987, chap. 3.
    440. Hurvich, M. (1970) On the concept of reality testing. IJP, 51.
    441. Isaacs, S. (1952) The nature and function of phantasy. In: Klein et. al. (1952).
    442. Isakower, O. (1938) A contribution to the pathopsychology of phenomena associated with falling asleep. IJP, 19.
    443. Isakower, O. (1963) Minutes of the faculty meeting. New York Psychoanalytic Institute, Oct. 14—Nov. 20. A. Z. Pteffer, reporter.
    444. Isay, R. A. (1986) Homosexuality in homosexual and heterosexual men. In: The Psychology of Men, ed. G. Fogel, F. Lane & R. Liebert. New York: Basic Books.
    445. Jacobi, J. (1959) Complex (Archetype) Symbol in the Work of C. G. Jung. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.
    446. Jacobs, T. J. (1986) Transference relationships, relationships between transferences and reconstruction. In: Psycho-analysis, the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale N. J.: Analytic Press.
    447. Jacobson, E. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    448. Jacobson, E. (1954) Contribution to the metapsychology of psychotic identifications. JAPA, 2.
    449. Jacobson, E. (1957) Normal and pathological moods. PSOC, 12.
    450. Jacobson, E. (1959) Depersonalization. JAPA, 7.
    451. Jacobson, E. (1964) The Self and the Object World. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    452. Jacobson, E. (1967) Psychotic Conflict and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    453. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    454. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression: Comparative Studies of Normal, Neurotic and Psychotic Conditions. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.
    455. Jacobson, E. (1971) Normal and pathological moods. In: Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    456. Jacobson, E. (1975) The regulation of self-esteem. In: Depression and Human Existence. ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.
    457. Jaffe, A. (1971) The Myth of Meaning. New York: Putnam.
    458. Jaffe, D. S. (1970) Forgetting and remembering. P. Q, 39.
    459. Janet, Dr. Pierre (1924) Principles of Psychotherapy. New York: Macmillan.
    460. John, E. R. (1976) A model of consciousness. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Schwartz & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1976, vol. 1.
    461. Jones, E. (1908) Rationalization in everyday life J Abnorm. Psychol., 3: 161—169.
    462. Jones, E. (1918) Anal-erotic character traits. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis London— Balliere Tindall & Cox, 1948.
    463. Jones, E. (1931) The concept of a normal mind. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis, 5th ed., London. Bailliйre, Tindall & Cox, 1948.
    464. Jones, E. (1933) The phallic phase. IJP, 14.
    465. Jones, E. (1934) Editorial preface to the Collected Papers of Sigmund Freud, 4. London— Hogarth Press.
    466. Jones, E. (1941) Evolution and revolution. IJP, 22.
    467. Jones, E. (1949) Hamlet and Oedipus. New York: Norton.
    468. Jones, E. (1957) The life and work of Sigmund Freud, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.
    469. Joseph, E. D. (1965) Regressive Ego Phenomena in Psychoanalysis. Monograph I, Kris Study Group. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    470. Joseph, E. D. (1966) Memory and conflict. PQ, 35.
    471. Joseph, E. D. & Wallerstein, R. S (1982) Psychotherapy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    472. Jung, C. G. (1921—57) Collected Works of C. G. Jung Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.
    473. Jung, C. G. (1938) Psychological aspects of the mother archetype. In: Collected Works, vol. 9, pt. 1.
    474. Jung, C. G. (1957) Animus and Anima. Zurich: Spring.
    475. Jung, C. G. (1963) Memories Dreams, Reflections. New York Pantheon.
    476. Kamyer, M. (1985) Identification and its vicissitudes. IJP, 66.
    477. Kandell, E (1976) Cellular Basis of Behavior. San Francisco— W H. Freeman.
    478. Kanzer, M. (1948) The passing of the Oedipus complex' in Greek drama. IJP, 29.
    479. Kanzer, M. (1964) On interpreting the Oedipus plays Psychoanal Study Society, 3.
    480. Kanzer, M. (1981) Freud's "analytic pact". JAPA, 29.
    481. Kardiner, A. (1941) The Traumatic Neurosis of War New. York: Hoeber.
    482. Karma, L. (1981) A clinical report of penis envy. JAPA, 29.
    483. Karush, A., Daniels, C. E., Flood, C. & O'Connor, J. F. (1977) Psychotherapy in Chronic Ulcerative Colitis. Philadelphia: Sannders.
    484. Katan, A. (1972) The infant's first reaction to strangers. IJP, 53.
    485. Katan, M. (1940) The role of the word in mania. Bull. Phi la. Assn. Psychoanal., 22.
    486. Katz, J. (1963) On primary gain and secondary gain. PSOC, 18.
    487. Katz, J. (1985) Book review of Melanie Klein by Hanna Segal. New York: Viking Press. 1980 JAPA, 33 (suppl.).
    488. Kaywin, L. (1966) Problems of sublimation. JAPA, 14.
    489. Kernberg, O. F. (1966) Structural derivations of object relationships. IJP, 47.
    490. Kernberg, O. F. (1967) Borderline personality organization. JAPA, 15.
    491. Kernberg, O. F. (1975) Borderline Conditions and Pathological Narcissism. New York: Jason Aronson.
    492. Kernberg, O. F. (1976) Object Relations Theory and Clinical Psychoanalysis. New York: Jason Aronson.
    493. Kernberg, O. F. (1977) Boundaries and structure in love relations. JAPA, 25.
    494. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Fairbairn's theory and challenge. In: Internal World and External Reality: Object Relations Theory Applied. New York: Jason Aronson.
    495. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Internal World and External Reality. New York: Jason Aronson.
    496. Kernberg, O. F. (1984) Severe Personality Disorders. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    497. Kessler, J. W. (1970) Contributions of the mentally retarded toward a theory of cognitive development. In: Cognitive Studies, ed. J. Hellmuth. New York Brunner/Mazel.
    498. Kestenberg, J. S. (1967) Phases of adolescence. J. Amer. Acad. Child. Psychiat., 6.
    499. Khan, M. (1982) Introduction. In: D. W. Winnicott, Through Paediatrics to Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    500. Klein, G. S. (1966) The several grades of memory. In: Psychoanalysis. A General Psychology, pd. H. M. Lowenstein, L M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    501. Klein, M. (1932) The Psychoanalysis of Children London: Hogarth Press.
    502. Klein, M. (1946) Notes on some schizoid mechanisms IJP, 27.
    503. Klein, M. (1948) Contributions to Psychoanalysis, 1921—45. London: Hogarth Press.
    504. Klein, M. (1950) Narrative of a Child Analysis. New York Basic Books.
    505. Klein, M. (1957) Envy and Gratitude. New York: Basic Books.
    506. Klein, M. (1957) On identification. In: New Directions in Psychoanalysis, ed. M. Klein, P. Heimann & R. Money-Kyrle. New York: Basic Books.
    507. Klein, M. (1959) On the development of Mental functioning. In: Envy and Gratitude London: Delacorte Press, 1975.
    508. Klein, M., Heimann, P., Isaacs, S. & Riviere J. (eds.) (1952) Developments in Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    509. Knight, R. P. (1953) Borderline states. Bull. Menn. Clin., 17.
    510. Knight, R. P. (1972) Clinician and Therapist: Selected Papers of Robert P. Knight, ed. Stuart C. Miller. New York: Basic Books.
    511. Kohut, H. (1959) Introspection, empathy, and psycho-analysis. JAPA, 7.
    512. Kohut, H. (1971) The Analysis of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    513. Kohut, H. (1977) The Restoration of the Self. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    514. Kohut, H. (1978) The Search for the Self, ed. P. Ornstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    515. Kohut, H. (1984) How Does Analysis Cure? ed. A Goldben & P. Stepansky. Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press.
    516. Kohut, H. & Wolf, E. S. (1978) The disorders of the self and their treatment. IJP, 59.
    517. Krapf, E. E. (1961) The concept of normality and mental, health in psychoanalysis. IJP, 59.
    518. Kreisler, L. (1984) Fundamentals for a psychosomatic pathology of infants. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry, ed. J. D. Call, E. Galenson & R. L. Tyson. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.
    519. Kris, A. O. (1982) Free Association. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    520. Kris, A. O. (1984) The conflicts of ambivalence. PSOC, 39.
    521. Kris, E. (1951) Ego psychology and interpretation in psychoanalytic therapy. P. Q, 20.
    522. Kris, E. (1952) Psychoanalytic Exploration in Art. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    523. Kris, E. (1956) On some vicissitudes of insight in psychoanalysis. IJP, 37.
    524. Kris, E. (1956) The personal myth. JAPA, 4.
    525. Kris, E. (1956) The recovery of childhood memories in psychoanalysis. PSOC, 11.
    526. Krupuick, J. L. & Horowitz, M. J. (1981) Stress response syndromes. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 38.
    527. Krystal, H. ed. (1968) Massive Psychic Trauma. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    528. Krystal, H. (1978) Trauma and affects. PSOC, 33.
    529. Krystal, H. (1981) The hedonic element in affectivity. J. Psychoanal., 9.
    530. Krystal, H. (1982) Alexithymia and the affectiveness of psychoanalytic treatment. Int. J. Psychoanal. Psychother., 9.
    531. Kubie, L. S. (1947) The fallacious use of quantitative concepts in dynamic psychology. P. Q, 16.
    532. Kubie, L. S. (1962) The fallacious misuse of the concept of sublimation. PQ, 31.
    533. Kubie, L. S. (1972) Personal communication.
    534. Kubie, L. S. (1975) The language tools of psychoanalysis. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 2.
    535. Labov, W. (1972) Language in the Inner City. Philadelphia: Univ. Penn. Press.
    536. Lagache, D. (1953) Behavior and psychoanalytic experience In Drives. Affects, Behavior, ed. R. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    537. Langer, S. K. (1962) Problems and techniques of psychoanalytic validation and progress. In: Psychoanalysis as Science, ed. E. Pumplan-Mindlin. Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press.
    538. Langer, W. (1958) The next assignment. Amer. Imago, 15.
    539. Langhlin, H. P. (1967) The Neurosis. Washington: Butterworth.
    540. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1967) Vocabulaire de la Psychoanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
    541. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1973) The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    542. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1983) The Language of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    543. Laseque, C. (1977) Les exhibitionnistes. L'Union Medicale, Froisieme Serie, 23.
    544. Leaff, L. A. (1971) Affect versus feeling. JAPA, 19.
    545. Leon, I. G. (1984) Psychoanalysis, Piaget and attachment. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.
    546. Lerner, H. E. (1976) Parental Mislabeling of female genitals as a determinant of penis envy and learning inhibitions in women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    547. Levey, M. (1985) The concept structure in psychoanalysis. Annu. Psychoanal. 12—13.
    548. Levy, D. (1983) Wittgenstein on the form of psychoanalytic interpretation. Int. Rev. Psycho-anal., 10.
    549. Levy, S. T. (1984) Principles of Interpretaion. New York: Aronson.
    550. Levy, S. T. (1984) Psychoanalytic perspectives on emptiness. JAPA, 32.
    551. Levy, S. T. (1985) Empathy and psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 33.
    552. Lewin, B. D. (1933) The body as phallus. PQ, 2.
    553. Lewin, B. D. (1946) Sleep, the mouth, and the dream screen. PQ, 15.
    554. Lewin, B. D. (1950) The Psychoanalysis of Elation. New York: Norton.
    555. Lewin, B. D. (1953) Reconslde ration of the dream screen. PQ, 22.
    556. Lewis, H. B. (1971) Shame and Guilt in Neurosis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    557. Lichtenberg, J., Bornstein, M. & Silver, D., eds. (1984) Empathy, vols. 1—2. Hillsdale & London: Analytic Press.
    558. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Kaplan, S. (1983) Reflections on Self Psychology. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    559. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Slap, J. W. (1973) Notes on the concept of splitting and defense mechanism of splitting of representations. JAPA, 21.
    560. Lichtenstein, H. (1961) Identity and sexuality. JAPA, 9.
    561. Lichtenstein, H. (1970) Changing implications of the concept of psychosexual development. JAPA, 18.
    562. Lidz, T., Fleck, S. & Cornelison. A. R. (1965) Schizophrenia and the Family. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    563. Lifschutz, J. E. (1976) A critique of reporting and assessment in the training analysis. JAPA, 24.
    564. Limentani, A. (1979) The significance of transsexualism in relation to some basic psychoanalytic concepts. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 6.
    565. Loewald, H. W. (1951) Ego and reality. IJP, 32.
    566. Loewald, H. W. (1959) The waning of the Oedipus complex. JAPA, 27.
    567. Loewald, H. W. (1962) Internalization, separation, mourning, and the superego. PQ, 31.
    568. Loewald, H. W. (1971) Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion. IJP, 52.
    569. Loewald, H. W. (1973) On internalization. IJP, 54.
    570. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951—72) Practice and Precept in Psycho analytic Technique. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1982.
    571. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951) The problem of interpretation. PQ, 20.
    572. Loewenstein, R. M. (1957) A contribution to the psychoanalytic theory of masochism. JAPA, 5.
    573. Loewenstein, R. M., Newman, L. M., Schur, M. & Solnit, A. J., eds. (1966) Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    574. Lorand, S. (1950) Clinical Studies in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    575. Lowinger, J. (1976) Ego Development. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.
    576. Luria, A. R. (1978) The human brain and conscious activity. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Shwarta & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1978, vol. 2.
    577. Lustman, J. (1977) On splitting. PSOC, 32.
    578. Lynd, H. M. (1961) On Shame and the Search for Identity New York: Science Editions.
    579. Madow, Z. & Snow, L. H., eds. (1970) The Psychodynamic Implications of the Physiological Studies on Dreams. Springfield, III: Thomas.
    580. Mahler, M. S. (1952) On child psychosis and schizophrenia. PSOC, 7.
    581. Mahler, M. S. (1963) Thoughts and development and individuation. PSOC. 12.
    582. Mahler, M. S. (1966) Notes on the development of basic moods: the depressive affect in psychoanalysis. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schuz & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    583. Mahler, M. S. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    584. Mahler, M. S. (1975) Discussion on Bernard L. Pacella's paper. JAPA, 23.
    585. Mahler, M. S. (1975) On the current status of infantile neurosis. JAPA, 23.
    586. Mahler, M. S. (1979) Selected Papers of Margaret S. Mahler, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.
    587. Mahler, M. S. & Purer, M. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    588. Mahler, M. S. & Gosliner, B. J. (1955) On Symbiotic child psychosis. PSOC, 10.
    589. Mahler, M. S., Pine, F. & Bergman, A. (1975) The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant. New York: Basic Books.
    590. Mahony, P. (1979) The boundaries of free association. Psychoanal. Contemp. Thought, 2.
    591. Malcove, L. (1975) The analytic situation (and Panel discussion). J. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 2.
    592. Marcovitz, E. (1973) On confidentiality in psychoanalysis. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 23.
    593. Marcus, I. M. & Francis, J. J. (1975) Masturbation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    594. Marty, P. & de M'Uzan, M. (1963) La pensйe opйratoire. Rev. Psychoanaltique, 27 suppl.
    595. Masson, J. M. (1980) The Oceanic Feeling. Boston: D. Reidel Publishing Company.
    596. Masters, W. H. & Johnson, V. E. (1966) Human Sexual Response. Boston: Little, Brown.
    597. McDaugall, J. (1984) The "dis-affected" patient. PQ, 53.
    598. McDevitt, J. B. (1975) Separation-individuation and object constancy. JAPA, 23.
    599. Meehl, P. E. (1962) Hedonic capacity. Bull. Menn. Clin., 39.
    600. Meissner, W. H. (1978) The Paranoid Process. New York: Aronson.
    601. Meissner, W. W. (1979) Internalization and object relations. JAPA, 27.
    602. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Internalization in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    603. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Metapsychology: who needs it. JAPA, 29.
    604. Meissner, W. W., Mack, J. E. & Semrad, E. V. (1975) Classical Psychoanalysis. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. A. M. Freedman, H. I. Kaplan & J. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    605. Menninger, W. (1943) Characterologic and symptomatic expressions related to the anal phase of psycho sexual development. PQ, 12.
    606. Mesmer, Franz Anton (1965) The Nature of Hypnosis, ed. Ronald E. Shor and Martin T. Orne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
    607. Metcalf, D. & Spitz, R. A. (1978) The transitional object. In: Grolnick et al. (1978).
    608. Meyer, B. C. (1972) The contribution of psychoanalysis to biography. Psychoanal. Contemp. Sci., 1.
    609. Meyer, J. (1982) The theory of gender identity disorders. JAPA, 30.
    610. Meyer, J. (1985) Ego-dystonic homosexuality. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, 4th ed., ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    611. Meyer, J. (1985) Paraphilia. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 4th ed.
    612. Michaels, R. & Gaeger, R. K. Adaptation. PMC. Forthcoming.
    613. Milrod, D. (1982) The wished-for-self-image. PSOC, 37.
    614. Modell, A. H. (1958) The Theoretical implications of hallucinatory experiences in schizophrenia. JAFA, 6.
    615. Modell, A. H. (1965) Object Love and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    616. Modell, A. H. (1970) The transitional object and the creative act. PQ, 39.
    617. Modell, A. H. (1975) The ego and the id. IJP, 56.
    618. Money, J. & Green, R. (1969) Transsexualism and Sex Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.
    619. Monroe, R. R (1970) Episodic Behavior Disorders. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    620. Moore, B. E. (164) Frigidity. PQ. 33.
    621. Moore, B. E. (1975) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.
    622. Moore, B. E. (1975) Toward a clarification on the concept of narcissism. PSOC, 30.
    623. Moore, B. E. (1976) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.
    624. Moore, B. E. (1977) Psychic representation and female orgasm. In: Female Psychology, ed. H. P. Blum. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    625. Moore, B. E. & Fine, B. D., eds. (1967) A Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts. New York: Amer. Psychoanal. Assn.
    626. Moore, B. E. & Rubinfine, D. Z. (1969) The mechanism of denial. Kris Study Group Monographs, New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 3.
    627. Moses, R. (1978) Adult psychic trauma. IJP, 59.
    628. Murray, C. D. (1930) Psychogenic factors in the etiology of ulcerative colitis and bloody diarrhea. Amer. J. Med. Sci., 180.
    629. Nagera, H., ed. (1966) Early Childhood Disturbances, the Infantile Neurosis, and the Adulthood Disturbances. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    630. Nagera, H. (1967) The concepts of structure and structuralization. PSOC, 22.
    631. Nagera, H. (1969—71) Basic Psychoanalytic Concepts. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    632. Nagera, H. (1976) Obsessional Neuroses. New York: Aronson.
    633. Natterson, J. M. (1980) The Dream in Clinical Practice. New York: Jason Aronson.
    634. Nemiah, J. C. & Sifneos, P. E. (1970) Affect and fantasy in patients with psychosomatic disorders. In: Modern Trends in Psychosomatic Medicine, ed. O. W. Hill. London: Butterworths, vol. 2.
    635. Neubaner, P. B. (1979) The role of insight in psychoanalysis JAPA, 27.
    636. Neubaner, P. B. (1982) Rivalry, envy, and Jealousy. PSOC, 37.
    637. Novick, J. (1982) Varieties of transference in the analysis of an adolescent. IJP, 42.
    638. Novick, J. & Kelly, K. (1970) Projection and externalization. PSOC, 25.
    639. Noy, P. Wollstein, S. & Kaplan-de-Nour, A. (1966) Clinical observations of the psychogenesis of impotence. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 39.
    640. Nunberg, H. (1948) The synthetic function of the ego. In: Practice and Theory of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.
    641. Nunberg, H. (1954) Evaluation of the results of psychoanalytic treatment. IJP, 35.
    642. Nunberg, H. (1955) Principles of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    643. Ogden, T. (1982) Projective Identification and Psycho-therapeutic Technique. New York: Jason Aronson.
    644. Olinick, S. Z. (1964) The negative therapeutic reaction. IJP, 45.
    645. Olinick, S. Z. (1980) The Psychotheraputic Instrument. New York: Jason Aronson.
    646. Ornston, D. G. (1978) On projection. PSOC, 33.
    647. Ornston, D. G. (1982) Strachey's influence. IJP, 63.
    648. Ornston, D. G. (1985a) Freud's conception is different from Strachey's. JAPA, 33.
    649. Ornston, D. G. (1985b) The invention of "cathexes" and Strachey's strategy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 12.
    650. Ornston, D. G. (1988) How standard is the "Standard Edition? In Freud in Exile, ed. E. Timns & N. Segal. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    651. Orr, D. W. (1954) Transference and countertransference. JAPA, 2.
    652. Ostow, M. (1974) Sexual Deviation. New York: Quadrangle.
    653. Pacella, B. (1975) Early ego development and the deja vu. JAPA, 23.
    654. Panel (1957) Acting out and its relation to impulse disorders. M. Kanzer, reporter. JAPA, 5.
    655. Panel (1958) Problems of identity. D. Z. Rubinfine, reporter. JAPA, 6.
    656. Panel (1958) Technical aspects of regression during psychoanalysis. K. T. Calder, reporter. JAFA, 11.
    657. Panel (1963) The concept of the id. E. Marcovitz, reporter. JAPA, 11.
    658. Panel (1964) Depersonalization. W. A. Stewart, reporter. JAPA, 12.,.
    659. Panel (1966) Clinical and theoretical aspects of "as-if" characters. J. Weiss, reporter. JAPA, 11.
    660. Panel (1969) The theory of genital primacy in the light of ego psychology. M. Berezin, reporter. JAPA, 17.
    661. Panel (1971) Action, acting out, and the symptomatic act. N. Actins, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    662. Panel (1970) Psychoanalytic theory of affects. L. B. Lofgren, reporter. JAPA, 16.
    663. Panel (1970) The development of the child's sense of his sexual identity. Virginia, L. Glower, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    664. Panel (1970) The negative therapeutic reaction. S. L. Olinick, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    665. Panel (1972) Levels of confidentiality in the psychoanalytic situation. A. S. Watson, reporter JAPA, 20.
    666. Panel (1974) Toward a theory of affects. P. Castelneuvo-Tedesco, reporter. JAPA, 22. W.
    667. Panel (1975) The analytic situation. S. T. Shapiro, reporter. J. Phila. Aasn. Psychoanal.,2.
    668. Panel (1980) New directions in affect theory. E. P. Lester, reporter. JAPA, 30.
    669. Panel (1981) Insight. K. H. Blacker, reporter. JAPA, 29.
    670. Panel (1981) Masochism. W. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 29.
    671. Panel (1982) Beyond lay analysis. H. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 30.
    672. Panel (1983) Clinical aspects of character. M. Willick, reporter. JAPA, 31.
    673. Panel (1983) Theory of character. S. M. Abend, reporter. JAPA, 31.
    674. Panel (1984) The neutrality of the analyst in the analytic situation, R. J. Leider, reporter. JAPA, 32. (1985) Perspectives on the nature of psychic reality. E. Roughton, reporter. JAPA, 33.
    675. Panel (1987) Toward the further understanding of homosexual women. A Wolfson, reporter. JAPA, 35.
    676. Pao, P.-N. (1971) Elation, hypomania and mania. JAFA, 19.
    677. Parens, H. (1979) The Development of Aggression in Early Childhood. New York: Jason Aronson.
    678. Parens, H. (1980) Psychic development during the second and third years of life. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington: Nat. Inst. Health.
    679. Parens, H. & Saul, L. J. (1971) Dependence in Man. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    680. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1974) The transsexual syndrome in males. Amer. J. Psychother., 28.
    681. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1983) Psychoanalytic theories of gender identity. J. Amer. Acad. Psychoanal., 2.
    682. Peterfreund, E. & Schwartz, J. T. (1971) Information, systems, and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    683. Peto, A. (1976) The etiological significance of the primal scene in perversions. PQ, 44.
    684. Pfeffer, A. Z. (1984) Modes of obsessional thinking. Presented at the New York Psychoanalytic Society, October 23.
    685. Piaget, J. (1937) The Construction of Reality in the Child. New York: Basic Books, 1954.
    686. Piaget, J. (1962) Play, Dreams and Imitation in Childhood New York: Norton.
    687. Piers, G. & Singer, M. B. (1953) Shame and Guilt. Springfield: Thomas; New ed., New York: Norton.
    688. Pine, F. (1985) Developmental Theory and Clinical Process. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    689. Poland, W. S. (1984) On the analyst's neutrality. JAFA, 32.
    690. Pollock, G. H. (1961) Mourning and adaptation. IJP, 42.
    691. Pollock, G. H. (1978) Process and affect. IJP, 59.
    692. Potamianau, A. (1985) The personal myth. PSOC, 40.
    693. Provence, S. & Lipton, R. (1962) Infants in Institutions. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    694. Pulver, S. E. Symptomatology. PMC. Forthcoming.
    695. Pulver, S. E. (1970) Narcissism. JAPA, 18.
    696. Rado, S. (1949) An adaptational view of sexual behavior In Psychosexual Development in Health and Disease, ed. P. H. Hock & J. Lubin. New York: Grune & Stratton.
    697. Rangell, L. Affects. PMC. Forthcoming.
    698. Rangell, L. (1959) The nature of conversion. JAPA, 7.
    699. Rangell, L. (1963) Structural problems in intrapsychic conflict. PSOC, 18.
    700. Rangell, L. (1966) An overview of the ending of an analysis. In: Psychoanalysis in Americas, ed. R. E. Litman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    701. Rangell, L. (1968) A point of view on acting out. IJP, 49.
    702. Rangell, L. (1981) From insight to change. JAPA, 29.
    703. Rangell, L. (1981) Psychoanalysis and dynamic psychotherapy. PQ, 50.
    704. Rangell, L. (1983) Defense and resistance in psychoanalysis and life. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).
    705. Rangell, L. (1985) The object in psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 33.
    706. Rank, O. (1909) The Myth of the Birth of the Hero. New York: Nerv. Ment. Dis. Monogr., 18.
    707. Rank, O. (1924) The Trauma of Birth. New York: Robert Brunner, 1952.
    708. Rapaport, D. (1942) Emotions and Memory. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1950.
    709. Rapaport, D. (1960) The structure of Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, monogr. 6, New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    710. Rapaport, D. & Gill, M. M. (1959) The points of view and assumptions of metapsychology. In: The Collected Papers of David Rapaport. New York: Basic Books, 1967.
    711. Rapoport, A. (1955) The role of symbols in human behavior. Psychiatric Research Reports, vol. 2, ed. J. S. Gottlieb et al. Washington: Amer. Psychiat. Assn.
    712. Rappaport, E. A. (1968) Beyond traumatic neurosis. IJP, 49.
    713. Reich, A. (1951) On countertransference. In: Psychoanalytic Contributions. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1973.
    714. Reich, A. (1953) Narcissistic object choice in women. JAPA, 1.
    715. Reich, A. (1954) Early identifications as archaic elements in the superego. JAPA, 2.
    716. Reich, A. (1960) Pathologic forms of self-esteem regulation. PSOC, 15.
    717. Reich, W. (1933) Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Press, 1949.
    718. Reich, W. (1933) Some circumscribed character forms. In: Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Institute Press.
    719. Reik, T. (1919) Ritual. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    720. Reiser, M. (1984) Mind, Brain and Body New York: Basic Books.
    721. Richards, A. D. (1985) Isakower-like experience on the couch. PQ. 54.
    722. Ricoeur, P. (1970) Freud and Philosophy. New Haven — Yale Univ. Press.
    723. Ricoeur, P. (1976) Interpretation Theory. Forth Worth-Texas Christian Univ. Press.
    724. Rinsley, D. B. (1982) Fairbairn's object relations and classical concepts of dynamics and structure. In: Borderline and Other Self Disorders' A Developmental and Object-Relations Respective New York: Jason Aronson.
    725. Rioch, M. (1970) The work of W. R Bion on groups. Psychiatry, 33.
    726. Ritvo, S. (1971) Late adolescence. PSOC, 18.
    727. Ritvo, S. (1974) Current status of the concept of infantile neurosis. PSOC, 29.
    728. Robbins, F & Sadow, L (1974) A developmental hypothesis of reality processing. JAPA, 22.
    729. Rodman, F. R. (1987) Introduction In the Spontaneous Gesture — Selected Letters of D. W. Winnicott, ed. F. R. Rodman Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.
    730. Roiphe, H. (1968) On an early genital phase. PSOC, 23.
    731. Roiphe, H. & Galenson, E. (1981) Infantile Roots of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    732. Rose, G. (1978) The creativity of everyday life. In: Grolnick et al (1978).
    733. Rose, H. (1928) A Handbook of Greek Mythology. London: Methuen.
    734. Rosenblatt, A. D. & Thickstun, J T. (1970) A study of the concept of psychic energy. IJP, 51.
    735. Rosenthal, S. M. (1968) The involutional depressive syndrome. Amer J. Psychiat., 124.
    736. Ross, N. (1967) The "as-if" concept. JAPA, 15.
    737. Ross, N. (1970) The primacy of genitality in the light of ego psychology. JAPA, 18.
    738. Rothstein, A. (1983) The Structural Hypothesis. New York: Int., Univ. Press.
    739. Roughton, R. Action and acting out. FMC. Forthcoming.
    740. Rubinstein, B. B. (1972) On metaphor and related phenomena. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. A. R. Holt & E. Peterfreund., New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.
    741. Rutter, M. (1972) Maternal Deprivation. Baltimore: Penguin Books.
    742. Rycroft, C. (1968) A critical Dictionary of Psychoanalysis New York: Basic Books.
    743. Sachs, D. M. (1979) On the relationship between psycho-analysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Bull. Phila Assn. Psychoanal, 6.
    744. Sachs, H. (1942) The Creative Unconscious Cambridge, Mass.: Sci. Art. Publishers.
    745. Samuels, A. (1985) Jung and the Post-Jungians London — Routledge & Kegan Paul.
    746. Sandler, J. (1960) On the concept of the superego. PSOC, 15.
    747. Sandler, J., Dare, C. & Holder, A (1973) The negative therapeutic reaction. In: The Patient and the Analyst New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    748. Sandler, J. & Freud, A. (1985) The Analysis of Defense. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    749. Sandler, J., Hodler, A. & Meers, D. (1963) The ego ideal and the ideal self. PSOC, 18.
    750. Sandler, J., Kennedy, H & Tyson, R. L (1980) The Technique of Child Psychoanalysis. Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.
    751. Sandler, J. & Rosenblatt, B. (1962) The concept of the representational world. PSOC, 17.
    752. Sandler, J. & Sandier, A. M. (1978) On the development of object relationships and affects. IJP, 59.
    753. Sarlin, C. N. (1962) Depersonalization and derealization. JAPA, 10.
    754. Sarlin, C. N. (1970) The current status of the concept of genital primacy. JAPA. 18.
    755. Sarnoff, C. A. (1978) Latency. New York: Aronson.
    756. Saussure de, F. (1911) Course in General Linguistic. New York: McGraw Hill.
    757. Schafer. R. (1968) Aspects of Internalization. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    758. Schafer. R. (1974) Problems in Freud's psychology of women. JAPA, 22.
    759. Schafer. R. (1975) Psychoanalysis without psychodynamics. IJP, 56.
    760. Schafer. R. (1976) A New Language for Psychoanalysis. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    761. Schafer. R. (1983) The Analytic Attitude. New York: Basic Books.
    762. Schechner, R. & Schuman, M. (1976) Ritual, Play and Performance New York: Seabury Press.
    763. Schlesinger, N. & Robbins, F. P. (1983) A Developmental View of the Psychoanalytic Process. New York; Int. Univ. Press.
    764. Schneirla, T. C. (1959) An evolutionary and developmental theory of biphasic processes underlying approach and withdrawal. In: Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, ed. H. R. Jones. London: Univ. Nebraska Press.
    765. Schur, M. (1955) Comments on the metapsychology of somatization. PSOC, 10.
    766. Schur, M. (1966) The Id and the Regulatory Principles of Mental Functioning. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    767. Schuster. D. B. (1969) Bisexuality and body as phallus. PQ, 38.
    768. Schwartz, H. J., ed. (1984) Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran. New York: SP Medical and Scientific Books.
    769. Segal, H. (1957) Notes on symbol formation. IJP, 39.
    770. Segal, H. (1964) Introduction to the Work of Melanie Klein. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.
    771. Segal, H. (1973) Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. London: W. Heinemann.
    772. Segal, H. (1981) The Work of Hanna Segal. New York: Jason Aronson.
    773. Segal, H. (1986) Illumination of the dim, shadowy era. Sunday Times, London, May 11, 1986.
    774. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1982) Psychoanalytic theories of aggression. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 2.
    775. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1984) The end phase of analysis. JAPA, 32.
    776. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1985) Change and integration in psychoanalytic developmental theory. In: New Ideas in Psychoanalysis, ed. C. F. Settlage & R. Brockbank. Hillsdale, N. J. Analytic Press.
    777. Shapiro, T. (1979) Clinical Psycholinguistics. New York: Plenum Press.
    778. Shapiro, T. (1984) On neutrality. JAPA, 32.
    779. Shengold, L. (1967) The effects of overstimulation. IJP, 48.
    780. Shopper, M. (1979) The (re)discovery of the vagina and the importance of the menstrual tampon. In: Female Adolescent Development, ed. M. Sugar. New York: Brunner/Mazel.
    781. Sifneos, P. E. (1975) Problems of psychotherapy of patients with alexithymic characteristics and physical disease Psychother & Psychosom., 26.
    782. Slap, J. & Saykin, J. (1984) On the nature and organization of the repressed. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 4.
    783. Slovenko, R. (1973) Psychiatry and Law. Boston: Little, Brown.
    784. Smith, J. H. (1976) Language and the genealogy of the absent object. In: Psychiatry and the Humanities, vol. 1, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven-Yale Univ. Press.
    785. Smith, J. H. ed. (1978) Psychoanalysis and Language. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    786. Smith, W. R. (1894) The Religion of the Semites. New York: Meridian Library, 1956.
    787. Socarides, C. W. (1963) The historical development of theoretical and clinical aspects of female homosexuality. JAPA, 11.
    788. Socarides, C. W. (1970) A psychoanalytic study of the desire for sexual transformation ("transsexualism"). IJP, 51.
    789. Socarides, C. W. (1978) Homosexuality. New York: Jason Aronson.
    790. Socarides, C. W. (1982) Abdication fathers, Homosexual Sons. In: Father and Child, ed. S. H. Cath, A. R. Gurwitt & J. M. Ross. Boston: Little, Brown.
    791. Solnit, A. J. & Ritvo, S. Instinct theory. PMC. Forthcoming.
    792. Sophocles. The Oedipus Cycle, tr. D. Fitts & R. Fitzgerald. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969.
    793. Sours, J. A. (1974) The anorexia nervosa syndrome. IJP, 55.
    794. Sours, J. A. (1980) Starving to Death in a Sia of Objects. New York: Aronson.
    795. Spence, J. T. & Helmrich, R. L. (1978) Masculinity and Femininity. Austin and London: Univ. of Texas Press.
    796. Sperber, D. (1974) Rethinking Symbolism. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.
    797. Sperling, M. (1976) Anorexia nervosa. In: Psychosomatic Disorders in Childhood, ed. O. Sperling. New York: Aronson.
    798. Spitz, R. A. (1945) Hospitalism. FSOC. 1.
    799. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Anaclitic depression. PSOC, 2.
    800. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Hospitalism: A follow-up report. PSOC, 2.
    801. Spitz, R. A. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psychol. Monagr. 34.
    802. Spitz, R. A. (1955) The primal cavity. PSOC, 10.
    803. Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and Yes. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    804. Spitz, R. A. (1959) A Genetic Field Theory of Ego Formation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    805. Spitz, R. A. (1965) The First Year of Life. New York:Int. Univ. Press.
    806. Spitz, R. A. & Wolf, K. M. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psycholol. Monogr., 34.
    807. Spruiell, V. The self. PMC. Forthcoming.
    808. Stamm, J. L. (1962) Altered ego states allied to the depersonalization. JAPA, 10.
    809. Stein, M. (1971) The principle of multiple function. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 21.
    810. Stekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.
    811. Sterba, R. E. (1936—37) Hardwцrterbuch der Psychoanalyse. Vienna: Int. Psychoanal. Verlag.
    812. Stern, D. N. (1974) The goal and structure of mother-infant play. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 13.
    813. Stern, D. N. (1984) Affect attunement. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.
    814. Stern, D. N. (1985) The Interpersonal World of the Infant New York: Basic Books.
    815. Stevens, A. (1982) Archetype. London: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.
    816. Stoller, R. J. (1971) The term "transvestism". Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 24.
    817. Stoller, R. J. (1972) The "bedrock" of masculinity and femininity: bisexuality. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 26.
    818. Stoller, R. J. (1974) Hostility and mystery in perversion. IJP, 55.
    819. Stoller, R. J. (1975) Sex and Gender, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.
    820. Stoller, R. J. (1976) Primary femininity. JAPA, 24 (5).
    821. Stoller, R. J. (1982) Hear miss. In: Eating, Sleeping, and Sexuality, ed. M. Zalea. New York: Brunner/ Mazel.
    822. Stoller, R. J. (1985) Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    823. Stolorow, R. (1984) Self psychology — a structural psychology. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    824. Stolorow, R. Transference. PMC. Forthcoming.
    825. Stone, L. (1954) The widening scope of indications for psychoanalysis. JAPA, 2.
    826. Stone, L. (1961) The Psychoanalytic Situation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    827. Stone, L. (1967) The psychoanalytic situation and transference. JAPA, 15.
    828. Stone, L. (1971) Reflections on the psychoanalytic concept of aggression. FQ, 40.
    829. Stone, L. (1973) On resistance to the psychoanalytic process. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. B. B. Rubinstein. New York: Macmillan, vol. 2.
    830. Stone, M. H. (1980) Borderline Syndromes. New York: McGrow Hill.
    831. Strachey, J. (1934) The nature of the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. IJP, 15.
    832. Strachey, J. (1962) The emergence of Freud's fundamental hypothesis. SE, 3.
    833. Strachey, J. (1963) Obituary (Joan Riviere). IJP, 44.
    834. Strachey, J. (1966) General preface. SE, 1.
    835. Swank, R. L. (1949) Combat exhaustion. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis., 109.
    836. Szekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.
    837. Taylor, G. J. (1977) Alexithymia and countertranceference. Psychother & Psychosom., 28.
    838. Ticho, E. (1972) Termination of psychoanalysis. PQ, 41.
    839. Tolpin, M. (1970) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 25.
    840. Tolpin, M. (1971) On the beginnings of a cohesive self. PSOC. 26.
    841. Tolpin, M. & Kohut, H. (1980) The disorders of the self. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington, B. C.: U. S. Dept. Health and Human Services.
    842. Turkle, S. (1986) A review of Grosskurth, P.: Molanie Klein. New York: Times Books, Review, May 18, 1986.
    843. Tyson, P. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    844. Tyson, P. (1982) A developmental line of gender identity, gender role, and choice of love object. JAPA, 30.
    845. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    846. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. The psychoanalitic theory of development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    847. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. (1984) Narcissism and superego development. JAPA, 34.
    848. Tyson, R. & Sundler, J. (1971) Problems in the selection of patients for psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 44.
    849. Valenstein, A. F. (1979) The concept of "classical" psycho-analysis. JAPA. 27. (suppl.).
    850. Volkan, V. D. (1981) Linking Objects and Linking Phenomena. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    851. Waelder, R. (1930) The principle of multiple function. PQ, 5.
    852. Waelder, R. (1962) Book review of Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy, ed. S. Hook. JAPA, 10.
    853. Waelder, R. (1962) Psychoanalysis scientific method, and philosophy. JAPA, 10.
    854. Waelder, R. (1963) Psychic determinism and the possibility of prediction. PQ, 32.
    855. Waelder, R. (1967) Trauma and the variety of extraordinary challenges. In: Fuest (1967).
    856. Waelder, R. (1967) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety: forty years later. PQ, 36.
    857. Waldhorn, H. F. (1960) Assessment of analyzability. PQ, 29.
    858. Waldhorn, H. F. & Fine, B. (1971) Trauma and symbolism. Kris Study Group monogr. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    859. Wallace, E. R. (1983) Freud and Anthropology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    860. Wallerstein, R. Reality. PMC. Forthcoming.
    861. Wallerstein, R. (1965) The goals of psychoanalysis. JAPA, 13.
    862. Wallerstein, R. (1975) Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    863. Wallerstein, R. (1983) Defenses, defense mechanisms and the structure of the mind. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).
    864. Wallerstein, R. (1988) One psychoanalysis or many? IJP, 69.
    865. Wangh, M. (1979) Some psychoanalytic observations on boredom. IJP, 60.
    866. Weinshel, E. M. (1968) Some psychoanalytic considerations on moods. IJP, 51.
    867. Weinshel, E. M. (1971) The ego in health and normality. JAPA, 18.
    868. Weisman, A. D. (1972) On Dying and Denying. New York: Behavioral Publications.
    869. Weinstock, H. J. (1962) Successful treatment of ulcerative colitis by psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Psychoanal. Res., 6.
    870. Welmore, R. J. (1963) The role of grief in psychoanalysis. IJP. 44.
    871. Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1984) Symbol Formation. Hillsdale N. J.: Lawrence Eribaum.
    872. White. R. W. (1963) Ego and Reality in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, 3.
    873. Whitman, R. M. (1963) Remembering and forgetting dreams in psychoanalysis. JAPA, 11.
    874. Wiedeman, G. Sexuality. PMC. Forthcoming.
    875. Wiedeman, G. (1962) Survey of psychoanalytic literature on overt male homosexuality. JAPA, 10.
    876. Wieder, H. (1966) Intellectuality. PSOC, 21.
    877. Wieder, H. (1978) The psychoanalytic treatment of preadolescents In Child Analysis and Therapy, ed. J. Glenn. New York Aronson.
    878. Willick, M. S. Defense. PMC. Forthcoming.
    879. Wilson, C. P. (1967) Stone as a symbol of teeth. PQ, 36.
    880. Wilson, C. P Hohan, C. & Mintz, I. (1983) Fear of Being Fat. New York: Aronson.
    881. Wilson, C. P. S Mintz, I. (1982) Abstaining and bulimic anorexics. Primary Care, 9.
    882. Wilson, E. O. (1978) On Human Nature. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    883. Winnicott, C. (1978) D. W. W.: a reflection. In: Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.
    884. Winnicott, D. W. (1953) Transitional object and transitional phenomena. In: Collected Papers. New York Basic Books, 1958.
    885. Winnicott, D. W. (1956) Primary maternal preoccupation. In: Winnicott (1958).
    886. Winnicott, D. W. (1958) Collected Papers. New York: Basic Books, Inc.
    887. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) Ego distortions in terms of true and false self. In: The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.
    888. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) The theory of the parent-infant relationship. In: Winnicott (1965).
    889. Winnicott, D. W. (1965) The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    890. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Playing and Reality. New York: Basic Books.
    891. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Therapeutic Consultations in Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.
    892. Winnicott, D. W. (1977) The Piggle. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    893. Winson, J. (1985) Brain and Psyche. New York: Anchor Press.
    894. Wolf, E. S. (1976) Ambience and abstinence. Annu. Psycho-anal., 4.
    895. Wolf, E. S. (1980) On the developmental line of self-object relations. In: Advances in Self Psychology, ed. A. Goldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    896. Wolf, E. S. (1983) Empathy and countertransference. In: The Future of Psychoanalysis, ed. A. Coldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    897. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Disruptions in the psychoanalytic treatment of disorders of the self. In: Kohut's Legacy, ed. P. Stepansky & A. Coldberg, Hillsdale, H. J.: Analytic Press, 1984.
    898. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Selfobject relations disorders. In: Character Pathology, ed. M. Zales. New York: Bruner/Mazel.
    899. Wolf, E. S. & Trosman, H. (1974) Freud and Popper-Lynkeus. JAPA, 22.
    900. Wolfenstein, M. (1966) How is mourning possible? PSOC, 21.
    901. Wolman, B. B. ed. (1977) The International Encyclopedia of Psychiatry, Psychology, Psychoanalysis, and Neurology. New York: Aesculapius.
    902. Wolpert, E. A. (1980) Major affective disorders. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman & B. J. Saddock. Boston: Williams & Wilkins, vol. 2.
    903. Wurmser, L. (1977) A defense of the use of metaphor in analytic theory formation. PQ, 46.
    904. Wurmser, L. (1981) The Mask of Shame. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.
    905. Zetzel, E. R. (1956) Current concepts of transference. TJP, 37.

    Словарь психоаналитических терминов и понятий > БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

  • 12 क्रम


    kráma
    m. a step AV. X, 5, 25 ff. TS. III MBh. etc.. ;

    going, proceeding, course (cf. kāla-k-) Mṛicch. Pañcat. Mālatīm. Hit. ;
    the way R. II, 25, 2 ;
    a position taken (by an animal etc.) before making a spring orﾠ attacking Pañcat. Bhaṭṭ. II, 9 ;
    the foot MBh. III, 14316 ;
    uninterrupted orﾠ regular progress, order, series, regular arrangement, succession (e.g.. varṇa-krameṇa, « in the order of the castes» Mn. VIII, 24 and IX, 85)
    AV. VIII, 9, 10 RPrāt. XV, 5 KātyṠr. R. etc.. ;
    hereditary descent Yājñ. II, 119 ;
    method, manner (e.g.. yenakrameṇa, in which manner R. II, 26, 20 ;
    tad-anusaraṇa-krameṇa, so as to go on following him Hit.);
    diet Car. VI, 13 ;
    custom, rule sanctioned by tradition MārkP. XXIII, 112 ;
    ( kramaṉ 1. kṛi, « to follow that rule») Nyāyam. ;
    occasion, cause (with gen. orﾠ ifc.) Kathās. XVIII, 380 Hit. ;
    « progressing step by step», a peculiar manner orﾠ method of reading andﾠ writing Vedic texts (so called because the reading proceeds from the 1st member, either word orﾠ letter, to the 2nd, then the 2nd is repeated andﾠ connected with the 3rd, the 3rd repeated andﾠ connected with the 4 h, andﾠ so on;
    this manner of reading in relation to words is called pada- TPrāt. II, 12, in relation to conjunct consonants varṇa- < ib. >) Prāt. ;
    the words orﾠ letters themselves when combined orﾠ arranged in the said manner ib. ;
    (in dram.) attainment of the object desired ( orﾠ accord. toﾠ others « noticing of any one's affection») Daṡar. I, 36 f. Sāh. Pratāpar. ;
    (in rhet.) a kind of simile (in which the comparisons exhibited correspond to each other in regular succession) Vām. IV, 3, 17 ;
    power, strength L. ;
    ( eṇa, āt) instr. abl. ind. in regular course, gradually, by degrees R. Pañcat. Ragh. etc.;
    according to order orﾠ rank orﾠ series Mn. Ragh. etc.
    - क्रमकारिका
    - क्रमकाल
    - क्रमकृत्
    - क्रमघन
    - क्रमचट
    - क्रमचन्द्रिका
    - क्रमज
    - क्रमजटा
    - क्रमजित्
    - क्रमज्यका
    - क्रमज्या
    - क्रमतस्
    - क्रमत्रैराशिक
    - क्रमदण्ड
    - क्रमदीपिका
    - क्रमध्वज
    - क्रमपद
    - क्रमपाठ
    - क्रमपार
    - क्रमपूरक
    - क्रमप्रवक्तृ
    - क्रमप्राप्त
    - क्रमभङ्ग
    - क्रमभाविन्
    - क्रमभ्रष्ट
    - क्रममाला
    - क्रमयोग
    - क्रमयौगपद्य
    - क्रमरत्नावली
    - क्रमरथ
    - क्रमराज्य
    - क्रमलेखा
    - क्रमवत्
    - क्रमवत्तु
    - क्रमवर्त
    - क्रमवृद्धि
    - क्रमशठ
    - क्रमशस्
    - क्रमशास्त्र
    - क्रमशिखा
    - क्रमसंहिता
    - क्रमसंग्रह
    - क्रमसंदर्भप्रभास
    - क्रमसरस्
    - क्रमसार
    - क्रमस्तुति
    - क्रमाक्रम
    - क्रमाक्रान्त
    - क्रमगत
    - क्रमादित्य
    - क्रमाध्ययन
    - क्रमाध्यायिन्
    - क्रमानुयायिन्
    - क्रमानुसार
    - क्रमान्वय
    - क्रमायात
    - क्रमावसान
    - क्रमेतर
    - क्रमोक्त
    - क्रमोढा
    - क्रमोद्वेग

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > क्रम

  • 13 स्वरः _svarḥ

    स्वरः [स्वर्-अच्, स्वृ-अप् वा]
    1 Sound, noise.
    -2 Voice; स्वरेण तस्याममृतस्रुतेव प्रजल्पितायामभिजातवाचि Ku.1.45.
    -3 A note of the musical scale or gamut, a tone, tune; (these are seven:-- निषादर्षभगान्धारषड्जमध्यमधैवताः ॥ पञ्चम- श्चेत्यमी सप्त तन्त्रीकण्ठोत्थिताः स्वराः Ak.); सप्त स्वरास्त्रयो ग्रामा मूर्छनाश्चैकविंशतिः Pt.5.54.
    -4 The number 'seven'.
    -5 A vowel.
    -6 An accent; (these are three; उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित q. q. v. v.); निहन्त्यरीनेकपदे य उदात्तः स्वरानिव Śi.2.95.
    -7 Air breathed through the nostrils.
    -8 Snoring.
    -9 Sweetness of tune or tone; तस्मादार्त्विज्यं करिष्यन् वाचि स्वरमिच्छेत तया वाचा स्वरसंपन्नयार्त्विज्यं कुर्यात् Bṛi. Up.1.3.25.
    -रा N. of the chief wife of Brahman.
    -Comp. -अंशः a half or quarter tone (in music).
    -अङ्कः a kind of musical composition.
    -अन्तरम् the interval between two vowels, hiatus.
    - उदय a. followed by a vowel.
    (-यः) 1 the production of sound.
    -2 see स्वरशास्त्र.
    -उपघातः hoarseness.
    - उपध a. preceded by a vowel.
    -कम्पः trembling of tone.
    -कर a. producing voice
    -क्षयः the loss of voice.
    -ग्रामः the musical scale, gamut.
    -च्छिद्रम् the sound-hole of a flute.
    -दीप्त a. (in augury) inauspicious with regard to voice.
    -नाभिः a kind of flute.
    -पत्तनम् N. of the Sāma-veda.
    -परिवर्तः change of voice.
    -वद्ध composed in musical measure.
    -ब्रह्मन् the Brahman as manifested in sound; स्वरब्रह्मणि निर्भातहृषीकेशपदाम्बुजे अखण्डं चित्तमावेश्य लोकाननुचरन् मुनिः ॥ Bhāg.6.5.22.
    -भक्तिः f. a vowel-sound phonetically inserted in the pronunciation of र् or ल् when these letters are followed by a sibilant or any single conso- nant; (e. g. वर्ष pronounced as वरिष).
    -भङ्गः, -भेदः 1 indistinctness of utterance, broken articulation.
    -2 hoarseness or cracking of voice.
    -भङ्गिन् m. a kind of bird.
    -मञ्चनृत्यम् a kind of dance.
    -मण्डलम् the circle of notes, arrangement of musical scales; सप्त स्वरास्त्रयो ग्रामा मूर्च्छनाश्चैकविंशतः तानास्त्वेकोनपञ्चाशदित्येतत्स्वरमण्डलम् ॥ Pt.5. 54.
    -मण्डलिका a kind of lute (वीणा).
    -मात्रा strength of sound.
    -योगः voice.
    -लासिका a flute, pipe.
    -विभक्तिः separation of a vowel.
    -शास्त्रम् 1 the science of the modulation of sounds.
    -2 the science of the passage of the air through the nostrils (as bearing on the prog- nostication of future events).
    -शुद्ध a. correct in musi- cal measure.
    -शून्य a. without musical notes, unmelo- dious, unmusical.
    -संयोगः 1 the junction of vowels.
    -2 the union of notes or sounds, i. e. voice; अन्य एवैष स्वरसंयागः Mk.1,3; U.3; पण्डितकौशिक्या इव स्वरसंयोगः श्रूयते M.5.
    -संक्रमः 1 a transition or succession of notes; तं तस्य स्वरसंक्रमं मृदुगिरः श्लिष्टं च तन्त्रीस्वनम् Mk.3.5.
    -2 the gamut.
    -संदेहविवादः a kind of round game; K.
    -संधिः the coalition of vowels.
    -संपद् f. melody of voice.
    -संपन्न a. having a melodious voice.
    -सामन् m. pl. epithets of particular days in a sacrificial session.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > स्वरः _svarḥ

  • 14 super

    1.
    sŭper, adj., v. superus.
    2.
    sŭper, adv. and prep. [Sanscr. upari; Gr. huper; Goth. ufar], above, over (often confounded in MSS. and edd. with supra, q. v.).
    I.
    Adv., above, on top, thereupon, upon, etc. (rare but class.).
    A.
    Lit., of place:

    Anien infraque superque Saxeus,

    Stat. S. 1, 3, 20:

    eo super tigna bipedalia, iniciunt,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 10:

    haec super e vallo prospectant Troes,

    Verg. A. 9, 168: implenturque super puppes, from above, i. e. by rain, id. ib. 5, 697:

    purpureas super vestes... Coniciunt,

    id. ib. 6, 221; cf. id. ib. 6, 217:

    renes tunicis super conteguntur,

    Cels. 3, 1 med.:

    imponendum super medicamentum,

    id. 6, 19 med. —
    B.
    Transf.
    1.
    Of that which is over and above in number or quantity, over, moreover, besides:

    satis superque esse sibi suarum cuique rerum,

    enough and to spare, more than enough, Cic. Lael. 13, 45:

    satis superque prudentes,

    id. Har. Resp. 9, 18:

    contra Epicurum satis superque dictum est,

    id. N. D. 2, 1, 2:

    ut satis superque vixisse videamur,

    id. Tusc. 1, 45, 110; Hor. Epod. 1, 31; Liv. 3, 53:

    quidque furor valeat, satisque Ac super ostendit,

    Ov. M. 4, 430:

    poenas dedit usque superque Quam satis est,

    Hor. S. 1, 2, 65: cui neque apud Danaos usquam locus;

    et super ipsi Dardanidae infensi, etc.,

    and moreover, and besides, Verg. A. 2, 71:

    saevit amor ferri... Ira super,

    id. ib. 7, 462:

    super talis effundit pectore voces,

    id. ib. 5, 482; 11, 670: voto deus aequoris alti Annuerat;

    dederatque super, ne saucius ullis Vulneribus fieri posset,

    Ov. M. 12, 206; 4, 751; 15, 308; Hor. S. 2, 7, 78; id. Ep. 2, 2, 33; Phaedr. 4, 24, 18:

    annum agens aetatis sexagensimum ac nonum, superque mensem ac diem septimum,

    Suet. Vesp. 24.— With gen. part.:

    non operae est satis superque oneris sustinenti res a populo Romano gestas scribere,

    Liv. 41, 25, 8:

    primoribus, super quam quod dissenserant a consilio, territis etiam duplici prodigio,

    besides that, Liv. 22, 3, 14; so,

    super quam quod,

    id. 27, 20, 10.—
    2.
    Less freq. of that which is left over, over, left, remaining:

    Atheniensibus exhaustis praeter arma et naves nihil erat super,

    Nep. Alcib. 8, 1; cf.:

    nec spes ulla super,

    Val. Fl. 8, 435:

    quid super sanguinis, qui dari pro republicā possit? rogitantes,

    Liv. 4, 58, 13:

    super tibi erunt, qui dicere laudes tuas cupiant,

    Verg. E. 6, 6:

    o mihi sola mei super Astyanactis imago,

    id. A. 3, 489.
    II.
    Prep. with acc. and abl., over, above, on the top of, upon, on.
    A.
    With acc.
    1.
    Lit., of place or situation:

    super terrae tumulum noluit quid statui, nisi columellam,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 26, 66:

    super lateres coria inducuntur,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 10; cf. id. ib. 2, 10, §

    4: super quas (naves) turrim ad introitum opposuit,

    id. ib. 3, 39 Dinter (al. quā):

    super vallum praecipitari,

    Sall. J. 58, 6; cf.:

    cum alii super aliorum capita ruerent,

    Liv. 24, 39, 5:

    super caput hostium pervenire,

    id. 32, 11, 8:

    aqua super montium juga concreta,

    id. 21, 58, 8:

    domos super se ipsos concremaverunt,

    id. 21, 14, 4:

    cenaculum super aedes datum est,

    id. 39, 14, 2:

    ad senaculum ac super id curiam,

    id. 41, 27, 7:

    equi super eum ruentis,

    id. 39, 49, 3:

    super eam (aspidem) assidere,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 18, 59:

    super theatrum consistere,

    Liv. 24, 39, 1:

    aquila super carpentum volitans,

    id. 1, 34, 8:

    illa super terram defecto poplite labens,

    Ov. M. 13, 477:

    collis erat, collemque super planissima Area,

    id. ib. 10, 86:

    ut scopulum super duram illidat corticem,

    Phaedr. 2, 6, 11:

    clatri super aquam emineant,

    Col. 8, 17, 10:

    super arcem pensiles horti sunt,

    Curt. 5, 1, 32:

    vestis super genua est,

    id. 5, 6, 18:

    super pulpitum consulares conlocare,

    Suet. Calig. 54.—
    b.
    Of position or distance, above, beyond: Nomentanus erat super ipsum, Porcius infra, was above him (at table), Hor. S. 2, 8, 23:

    Polypercon, qui cubabat super regem,

    Curt. 8, 5, 22:

    super se collocavit,

    Suet. Aug. 43.—Of geographical situation:

    super Numidiam Gaetulos accepimus,

    beyond Numidia, Sall. J. 19, 5:

    super et Garamantas et Indos Proferet imperium,

    Verg. A. 6, 795:

    super Sunium navigans,

    Liv. 28, 8, 11:

    sita est super Ambracium sinum,

    id. 43, 21, 6:

    super Demetriadem promunturium,

    id. 31, 46, 7; 43, 21, 6:

    qui super Bosporum colunt,

    Curt. 6, 2, 13; 7, 6, 12; 8, 1, 7:

    Lydia super Ioniam procedit,

    extends beyond, Plin. 5, 29, 30, § 110.—Of official position ( = supra):

    super armamentarium positus,

    Curt. 6, 7, 22; Scrib. Comp. 162.—
    2.
    Transf.
    a.
    Of time, during, at (postAug.):

    de hujus nequitiā omnes super cenam loquebantur,

    Plin. Ep. 4, 22, 6; 3, 5, 11; 9, 33, 1; cf.:

    super vinum et epulas,

    Curt. 8, 4, 30; 8, 12, 17; Suet. Aug. 77; id. Caes. 87:

    super mensam,

    Curt. 7, 4, 7:

    super hos divum honores,

    i. e. during the sacrifice, Stat. Th. 1, 676; Flor. 4, 2, 69.—
    b.
    Of that which is over and above a certain number or quantity, over, above, beyond, upon, besides, in addition to (not freq. till after the Aug. period):

    quod alii super alios legati venirent speculaturi,

    i. e. in rapid succession, constantly, Liv. 42, 25, 8: vox non paene tragoedorum sed super omnes tragoedos, [p. 1804] Quint. 12, 5, 5:

    super modum ac paene naturam,

    id. 11, 3, 169:

    super necessitatem,

    id. 9, 3, 46:

    famosissima super ceteras fuit cena ei data adventicia,

    Suet. Vit. 13:

    super veteres amicos,

    id. Tib. 55.—With numerals:

    super tris modios,

    Liv. 23, 12, 1:

    super LX. milia,

    Tac. G. 33:

    super octingentos annos,

    id. A. 13, 58:

    super quadraginta reos,

    Suet. Calig. 38:

    super HS. millies,

    id. Caes. 26; id. Ner. 30:

    senioribus super sexaginta annos in Epirum missis,

    Liv. 26, 25, 11; cf.:

    super triginta ducibus triumphos decernendos curavit,

    Suet. Aug. 38:

    Punicum exercitum super morbum etiam fames affecit,

    Liv. 28, 46, 15:

    super tam evidentem tristis ominis eventum, etiam, etc.,

    id. 41, 18, 14:

    super dotem haec tibi dona accedent,

    id. 26, 50, 12; 2, 51, 2:

    super solitos honores,

    id. 2, 31, 3:

    super vota fluere,

    beyond all wishes, Tac. H. 3, 48:

    super obscena dicta et petulans jurgium,

    Phaedr. 3, 11, 2:

    dare savia super savia,

    kisses upon kisses, Plaut. Ps. 4, 1, 38:

    alii super alios trucidentur,

    Liv. 1, 50, 6:

    vulnus super vulnus,

    id. 22, 54, 9:

    ut habitationes super pretium libertatis praestarentur,

    Dig. 18, 6, 19.—Esp. freq.: super omnia, above all, before all (in Plin. the elder, super omnia and super omnes always at the beginning of the phrase; v. Sillig ad Plin. 33, 3, 19, § 62):

    talia carminibus celebrant: super omnia Caci Speluncam adiciunt,

    Verg. A. 8, 303:

    aetas et forma et super omnia Romanum nomen,

    Liv. 31, 18, 3; Plin. 36, 15, 24, § 118; Quint. 12, 9, 12; Ov. M. 6, 526; 8, 677; so,

    tu super omnes beatus,

    Plin. Ep. 7, 13, 2; Suet. Vit. 13; Quint. 12, 5, 5.—
    c.
    Hence, transf., in gen., for plus quam, amplius quam, more than (late Lat.):

    qui amat filium aut filiam super me,

    Vulg. Matt. 10, 37; cf.:

    dulciora sunt super mel et favum,

    id. Psa. 18, 11.—
    B.
    With abl.
    1.
    Lit., of place or situation (rare and mostly poet.):

    regulae, quae lateres, qui super musculo struantur, contineant,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 10:

    ensis cui super Cervice pendet,

    Hor. C. 3, 1, 17:

    ligna super foco Large reponens,

    id. ib. 1, 9, 5:

    parumne campis atque Neptuno super Fusum est Latini sanguinis,

    id. Epod. 7, 3:

    super Pindo,

    id. C. 1, 12, 6:

    requiescere Fronde super viridi,

    Verg. E. 1, 81. —
    2.
    Transf.
    a.
    Of time (cf. supra, A. 2. a.), during, in:

    nocte super mediā,

    Verg. A. 9, 61; cf.:

    Centaurea cum Lapithis rixa super mero Debellata,

    Hor. C. 1, 18, 8.—
    b.
    For the usual de, to indicate respect, reference, upon, about, concerning, respecting (freq. in the ante-class. and after the Aug. period; in Cic. only a few times in his letters; not in Cæs.): nemo antea fecit super tali re cum hoc magistratu utique rem, Cato ap. Fest. s. v. superescit, p. 305 Müll.; so Pac. ib.; Plaut. Am. prol. 58; id. Most. 3, 2, 39:

    hac super re scribam ad te Rhegio,

    Cic. Att. 16, 6, 1:

    sed hac super re nimis (sc. dixi),

    id. ib. 10, 8, 10:

    litteras super tantā re exspectare,

    Liv. 26, 15, 5:

    cura super tali re principum laudata est,

    id. 40, 46, 15:

    multus eā super re rumor,

    Tac. A. 11, 23:

    quid nuntias super anu?

    Plaut. Cist. 4, 1, 8:

    super Euclionis filia,

    id. Aul. 4, 7, 2:

    super ancillā,

    id. Cas. 2, 3, 36:

    super amicā,

    id. Bacch. 2, 3, 133; 3, 6, 33; 4, 2, 25:

    quid agendum nobis sit super legatione votivā,

    Cic. Att. 14, 22, 2:

    super tali causā missi,

    Nep. Paus. 4:

    legare super familia pecuniave sua,

    Auct. Her. 1, 13, 23:

    super tali causā,

    Nep. Paus. 4, 1:

    multa super Priamo rogitans, super Hectore multa,

    Verg. A. 1, 750; 4, 233:

    super arvorum cultu,

    id. G. 4, 559:

    mitte civiles super Urbe curas,

    Hor. C. 3, 8, 17:

    publicus ludus super impetrato Augusti reditu,

    id. ib. 4, 2, 42:

    decreta super jugandis Feminis,

    id. C. S. 18:

    consultant bello super,

    Sil. 2, 271; 5, 615:

    ne super tali scelere suspectum sese haberet,

    Sall. J. 71, 5:

    super adimendā vitā,

    Amm. 14, 7, 12.—
    c.
    Over and above, besides, beyond (very rare):

    modus agri... hortus... fons... Et paulum silvae super his,

    Hor. S. 2, 6, 3:

    excogitatum est super his, ut, etc.,

    Amm. 14, 1, 6; Sil. 1, 60.
    ► In composition, super denotes,
    1.
    Above, over, of place: supercerno, supercresco, superdo, superemineo, superemorior, superferc, superfluo, superfugio, superfundo, supergredior, superjacio, superimpono, superincumbo, superinduco, supernato, superpono, supersedeo, supersterno, supersto, supervehor, supervenio, etc.—
    2.
    Less freq., over and above, besides, in addition: superaddo, superbibo, supersum, superstes, superfio.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > super

  • 15 כפל

    כָּפַל(b. h.; cmp. כפף) to bend over, fold, double. Ber.63a כּוֹפְלִין לווכ׳ his means of support will be doubled to him. Gen. R. s. 95, end כל מי שכ׳ שמווכ׳ every one whose name the Scripture mentions twice in the blessings of Moses; (B. Kam.92a אותן שהוּכְפְּלוּ בשמות). Succ.III, 11 מקום … לִכְפּוֹל יִכְפּוֹל where it is customary to recite twice (each verse of Ps. 118:21–29), let one do so. Tosef.Pes.X, 9 רבי היה כּוֹפֵל בה דברים Rabbi used to repeat certain words (in singing the Hallel); Pes.119b; Succ.39a מוסיף לכפול מאודךוכ׳ adds (to Rabbis repetitions) by doubling the verses from Odkha (Ps. l. c.). Sifra Vayikra, Ndabah, Par. 10, ch. XII; Men.VI, 4 (75b) כופל אחדוכ׳ (Bab. ed. קופל) he folds it twice over and breaks it (into four parts). Ned.61b יכפלו, v. קָפַל. Gitt.62a כּוֹפְלִין שלוםוכ׳ we must double the greeting (say twice shalom) B. Mets. 104b לכפולוכ׳ where it is costumary to write out the Kthubah for double the amount of the dowry, half the amount is collected; a. fr.Part. pass. כָּפוּל, f. כְּפוּלָה; pl. כְּפוּלִים, כְּפוּלִין; כְּפוּלוֹת. Kel. XXVII, 5 נמדד כ׳ is measured as it is doubled (folded). Ib. 6.Ohol. XI, 3 כ׳ Var. in R. S. a. l. (ed. ק׳) folded up one above the other. Ned.66b כ׳ הן her ears are bent over (deformed).Treat. Sofrim II, 11 אותיות הכ׳ letters which have two forms ( מנצפך); a. fr.תנאי כ׳, v. תְּנַאי. Nif. נִכְפַּל to be doubled. Y.Kil.IX, 32c top נִכְפְּלוּ לו שניו his years of life were doubled to him. Gen. R. s. 30, beg.; Tanḥ. Shmoth 18, a. e. כל מישנ׳ שמו every one whose name appears twice in immediate succession (as Noah Noah, Gen. 6:9); a. fr. Hif. הִכְפִּיל to double, fold up. Ned.61b, sq., v. קָפַל. Hof. הוּכְפָּל to be doubled, bent. Ib., v. קָפַל. M. Kat. 25b (in a poetic eulogy) קאת … הוּכְפְּלוּ לראותוכ׳ pelican and owl were bent upon looking (took pains to see, cmp. next w. Ithp.).B. Kam.92a, v. supra.Part. pass. מוּכְפָּל (Pu. מְכוּפָּל) doubly guarded, surrounded. Yalk. Lev. 557 מוכ׳ כמה כְפֵלוֹת; Lev. R. s. 16 מכו׳ בכמה כפולות (the tongue) is guarded by several folding doors (teeth, lips). Pi. כִּיפֵּל to fold. Sifra l. c.; Men. l. c. לא היה מְכַפְּלָהּ (Bab. ed. מק׳) he did not fold it (in four parts, v. supra).

    Jewish literature > כפל

  • 16 כָּפַל

    כָּפַל(b. h.; cmp. כפף) to bend over, fold, double. Ber.63a כּוֹפְלִין לווכ׳ his means of support will be doubled to him. Gen. R. s. 95, end כל מי שכ׳ שמווכ׳ every one whose name the Scripture mentions twice in the blessings of Moses; (B. Kam.92a אותן שהוּכְפְּלוּ בשמות). Succ.III, 11 מקום … לִכְפּוֹל יִכְפּוֹל where it is customary to recite twice (each verse of Ps. 118:21–29), let one do so. Tosef.Pes.X, 9 רבי היה כּוֹפֵל בה דברים Rabbi used to repeat certain words (in singing the Hallel); Pes.119b; Succ.39a מוסיף לכפול מאודךוכ׳ adds (to Rabbis repetitions) by doubling the verses from Odkha (Ps. l. c.). Sifra Vayikra, Ndabah, Par. 10, ch. XII; Men.VI, 4 (75b) כופל אחדוכ׳ (Bab. ed. קופל) he folds it twice over and breaks it (into four parts). Ned.61b יכפלו, v. קָפַל. Gitt.62a כּוֹפְלִין שלוםוכ׳ we must double the greeting (say twice shalom) B. Mets. 104b לכפולוכ׳ where it is costumary to write out the Kthubah for double the amount of the dowry, half the amount is collected; a. fr.Part. pass. כָּפוּל, f. כְּפוּלָה; pl. כְּפוּלִים, כְּפוּלִין; כְּפוּלוֹת. Kel. XXVII, 5 נמדד כ׳ is measured as it is doubled (folded). Ib. 6.Ohol. XI, 3 כ׳ Var. in R. S. a. l. (ed. ק׳) folded up one above the other. Ned.66b כ׳ הן her ears are bent over (deformed).Treat. Sofrim II, 11 אותיות הכ׳ letters which have two forms ( מנצפך); a. fr.תנאי כ׳, v. תְּנַאי. Nif. נִכְפַּל to be doubled. Y.Kil.IX, 32c top נִכְפְּלוּ לו שניו his years of life were doubled to him. Gen. R. s. 30, beg.; Tanḥ. Shmoth 18, a. e. כל מישנ׳ שמו every one whose name appears twice in immediate succession (as Noah Noah, Gen. 6:9); a. fr. Hif. הִכְפִּיל to double, fold up. Ned.61b, sq., v. קָפַל. Hof. הוּכְפָּל to be doubled, bent. Ib., v. קָפַל. M. Kat. 25b (in a poetic eulogy) קאת … הוּכְפְּלוּ לראותוכ׳ pelican and owl were bent upon looking (took pains to see, cmp. next w. Ithp.).B. Kam.92a, v. supra.Part. pass. מוּכְפָּל (Pu. מְכוּפָּל) doubly guarded, surrounded. Yalk. Lev. 557 מוכ׳ כמה כְפֵלוֹת; Lev. R. s. 16 מכו׳ בכמה כפולות (the tongue) is guarded by several folding doors (teeth, lips). Pi. כִּיפֵּל to fold. Sifra l. c.; Men. l. c. לא היה מְכַפְּלָהּ (Bab. ed. מק׳) he did not fold it (in four parts, v. supra).

    Jewish literature > כָּפַל

  • 17 П-386

    СТЕРЕТЬ (ИСТЕРЕТЬ) В (МЕЛКИЙ) ПО-РОШОК кого coll VP subj: human or collect often pfv fut, used as a threat) (in refer, to killing s.o., or ruining s.o. 's career, social standing etc) to deal with s.o. harshly or destroy s.o.: X сотрёт Y-a в порошок — X will make mincemeat of Y X will pulverize Y X will grind Y to (into) dust X will grind Y into the dust X will be utterly ruthless with Y.
    Каждый дом, квартира... деревня, не говоря уж о городах и областях, получили своего верховода (сначала их было по несколько, потом один брал верх), который распоряжался, инструктировал, отдавал приказания и обязательно грозил стереть сопротивляющегося в порошок (Мандельштам 2). Every house, apartment, and village, not to mention every town and province, had its little tyrant (at first there would be several, until a single one took over), who gave orders and instructions, threatening always to "make mincemeat" of anyone who resisted (2a).
    В бесчисленных кабинетах меня уговаривали, умоляли снять свою подпись (с писем в защиту нескольких писателей), мне льстили, мне угрожали, обещали стереть меня в порошок (Войнович 1). In an endless succession of offices I was urged and entreated to withdraw my signature (from letters in defense of several writers). I was flattered, threatened - they promised to grind me to dust (1a).
    Все понимали, что если Королёв жертвует собой (а состояние его здоровья было всем известно), то он сотрёт в порошок всякого, кто нерасторопностью или просто неполным напряжением сил задержит подготовку хоть на минуту (Владимиров 1). They all understood that if Korolyov was sacrificing himself (and everybody knew about the state of his health) he would be utterly ruthless with anyone who through slackness or failure to make a real effort held up the preparations even by a minute (1a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > П-386

  • 18 истереть в мелкий порошок

    • СТЕРЕТЬ < ИСТЕРЕТЬ> В (МЕЛКИЙ) ПОРОШОК кого coll
    [VP; subj: human or collect; often pfv fut, used as a threat]
    =====
    ⇒ (in refer, to killing s.o., or ruining s.o.'s career, social standing etc) to deal with s.o. harshly or destroy s.o.:
    - X сотрёт Y-а в порошок≈ X will make mincemeat of Y;
    - X will grind Y to < into> dust;
    - X will be utterly ruthless with Y.
         ♦ Каждый дом, квартира... деревня, не говоря уж о городах и областях, получили своего верховода (сначала их было по несколько, потом один брал верх), который распоряжался, инструктировал, отдавал приказания и обязательно грозил стереть сопротивляющегося в порошок (Мандельштам 2). Every house, apartment, and village, not to mention every town and province, had its little tyrant (at first there would be several, until a single one took over), who gave orders and instructions, threatening always to "make mincemeat" of anyone who resisted (2a).
         ♦ В бесчисленных кабинетах меня уговаривали, умоляли снять свою подпись [с писем в защиту нескольких писателей], мне льстили, мне угрожали, обещали стереть меня в порошок (Войнович 1). In an endless succession of offices I was urged and entreated to withdraw my signature [from letters in defense of several writers]. I was flattered, threatened - they promised to grind me to dust (1a).
         ♦ Все понимали, что если Королёв жертвует собой (а состояние его здоровья было всем известно), то он сотрёт в порошок всякого, кто нерасторопностью или просто неполным напряжением сил задержит подготовку хоть на минуту (Владимиров 1). They all understood that if Korolyov was sacrificing himself (and everybody knew about the state of his health) he would be utterly ruthless with anyone who through slackness or failure to make a real effort held up the preparations even by a minute (1a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > истереть в мелкий порошок

  • 19 истереть в порошок

    • СТЕРЕТЬ < ИСТЕРЕТЬ> В (МЕЛКИЙ) ПОРОШОК кого coll
    [VP; subj: human or collect; often pfv fut, used as a threat]
    =====
    ⇒ (in refer, to killing s.o., or ruining s.o.'s career, social standing etc) to deal with s.o. harshly or destroy s.o.:
    - X сотрёт Y-а в порошок≈ X will make mincemeat of Y;
    - X will grind Y to < into> dust;
    - X will be utterly ruthless with Y.
         ♦ Каждый дом, квартира... деревня, не говоря уж о городах и областях, получили своего верховода (сначала их было по несколько, потом один брал верх), который распоряжался, инструктировал, отдавал приказания и обязательно грозил стереть сопротивляющегося в порошок (Мандельштам 2). Every house, apartment, and village, not to mention every town and province, had its little tyrant (at first there would be several, until a single one took over), who gave orders and instructions, threatening always to "make mincemeat" of anyone who resisted (2a).
         ♦ В бесчисленных кабинетах меня уговаривали, умоляли снять свою подпись [с писем в защиту нескольких писателей], мне льстили, мне угрожали, обещали стереть меня в порошок (Войнович 1). In an endless succession of offices I was urged and entreated to withdraw my signature [from letters in defense of several writers]. I was flattered, threatened - they promised to grind me to dust (1a).
         ♦ Все понимали, что если Королёв жертвует собой (а состояние его здоровья было всем известно), то он сотрёт в порошок всякого, кто нерасторопностью или просто неполным напряжением сил задержит подготовку хоть на минуту (Владимиров 1). They all understood that if Korolyov was sacrificing himself (and everybody knew about the state of his health) he would be utterly ruthless with anyone who through slackness or failure to make a real effort held up the preparations even by a minute (1a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > истереть в порошок

  • 20 стереть в мелкий порошок

    • СТЕРЕТЬ < ИСТЕРЕТЬ> В (МЕЛКИЙ) ПОРОШОК кого coll
    [VP; subj: human or collect; often pfv fut, used as a threat]
    =====
    ⇒ (in refer, to killing s.o., or ruining s.o.'s career, social standing etc) to deal with s.o. harshly or destroy s.o.:
    - X сотрёт Y-а в порошок≈ X will make mincemeat of Y;
    - X will grind Y to < into> dust;
    - X will be utterly ruthless with Y.
         ♦ Каждый дом, квартира... деревня, не говоря уж о городах и областях, получили своего верховода (сначала их было по несколько, потом один брал верх), который распоряжался, инструктировал, отдавал приказания и обязательно грозил стереть сопротивляющегося в порошок (Мандельштам 2). Every house, apartment, and village, not to mention every town and province, had its little tyrant (at first there would be several, until a single one took over), who gave orders and instructions, threatening always to "make mincemeat" of anyone who resisted (2a).
         ♦ В бесчисленных кабинетах меня уговаривали, умоляли снять свою подпись [с писем в защиту нескольких писателей], мне льстили, мне угрожали, обещали стереть меня в порошок (Войнович 1). In an endless succession of offices I was urged and entreated to withdraw my signature [from letters in defense of several writers]. I was flattered, threatened - they promised to grind me to dust (1a).
         ♦ Все понимали, что если Королёв жертвует собой (а состояние его здоровья было всем известно), то он сотрёт в порошок всякого, кто нерасторопностью или просто неполным напряжением сил задержит подготовку хоть на минуту (Владимиров 1). They all understood that if Korolyov was sacrificing himself (and everybody knew about the state of his health) he would be utterly ruthless with anyone who through slackness or failure to make a real effort held up the preparations even by a minute (1a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > стереть в мелкий порошок

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • The Carmelite Order —     The Carmelite Order     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Carmelite Order     One of the mendicant orders.     Origin     The date of the foundation of the Order of Our Lady of Mount Carmel has been under discussion from the fourteenth century to …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Pope —     The Pope     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Pope     (Ecclesiastical Latin papa from Greek papas, a variant of pappas father, in classical Latin pappas Juvenal, Satires 6:633).     The title pope, once used with far greater latitude (see below …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Church —     The Church     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Church     The term church (Anglo Saxon, cirice, circe; Modern German, Kirche; Sw., Kyrka) is the name employed in the Teutonic languages to render the Greek ekklesia (ecclesia), the term by which… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • letters of administration — see letter 2 Merriam Webster’s Dictionary of Law. Merriam Webster. 1996. letters of administration …   Law dictionary

  • The Apostolic Fathers —     The Apostolic Fathers     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Apostolic Fathers     Christian writers of the first and second centuries who are known, or are considered, to have had personal relations with some of the Apostles, or to have been so… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Rite of Constantinople (Byzantine Rite) —     The Rite of Constantinople     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Rite of Constantinople     (Also BYZANTINE RITE.)     The Liturgies, Divine Office, forms for the administration of sacraments and for various blessings, sacramentals, and exorcisms …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Irish (in Countries Other Than Ireland) —     The Irish (in countries other than Ireland)     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Irish (in countries other than Ireland)     I. IN THE UNITED STATES     Who were the first Irish to land on the American continent and the time of their arrival are …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Gunpowder Plot —     The Gunpowder Plot     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Gunpowder Plot     (Oath taken May, 1604, plot discovered November, 1605). Robert Catesby, the originator of the Powder Plot, owned estates at Lapworth and Ashby St. Legers. His ancient and …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Emergency (Ireland) — The Emergency ( ga. Ré na Práinne) was an official euphemism used by the Irish Government during the 1940s to refer to its position during World War II. The state was officially neutral during World War II, but declared an official state of… …   Wikipedia

  • The Pike & Shot Society — The Pike and Shot Society is an international organisation promoting the study of the military history of the Renaissance and Early Modern world. For The Pike and Shot Society this period covers the years between 1400 and 1721, a time span that… …   Wikipedia

  • The Church in China —     The Church in China     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Church in China     Ancient Christians     The introduction of Christianity into China has been ascribed not only to the Apostle of India, St. Thomas, but also to St. Bartholomew. In the… …   Catholic encyclopedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»